HP 9000 Series 320 Technical data

HP-UX Installing Peripherals
HP 9000 Series 300 Computers
HP Part Number 97005-90002
Hewlett-Packard Company
3404 East Harmony Road. Fort Collins, Colorado 80525
Legal Notices
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual,
including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and
fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for
errors contained herein or direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential
damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this
material.
Warranty. A copy of the specific warranty terms applicable to your
Hewlett-Packard product and replacement parts can be obtained from your
local Sales and Service Office.
Copyright © Hewlett-Packard Company, 1989
This document contains information which is protected by copyright. All rights
are reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written
permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
Restricted Rights Legend. Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government
Department of Defense is subject to restrictions as set forth in paragraph
(b)(3)(h) of the Rights in Technical Data and Software clause in
FAR 52.227-7013.
Copyright © AT&T, Inc. 1980, 1984, 1986
Copyright © The Regents of the University of California 1979, 1980, 1983,
1985
This software and documentation is based in part on the Fourth Berkeley
Software Distribution under license from the Regents of the University of
California.
Printing History
New editions of this manual will incorporate all material updated since the
previous edition. Update packages may be issued between editions and contain
replacement and additional pages to be merged into the manual by the user.
Each updated page will be indicated by a revision date at the bottom of the
page. Note that pages which are rearranged due to changes on a previous page
are not considered revised.
The manual printing date and part number indicate its current edition. The
printing date changes when a new edition is printed. (Minor corrections and
updates which are incorporated at reprint do not cause the date to change.)
The manual part number changes when extensive technical changes are
incorporated.
July 1985 ... Edition 1.
November 1985 ... Edition 2.
February 1987 ... Edition 3.
July 1987 ... Update to include HP98248A Floating-Point Accelerator, HP
98548/49/50A High Resolution Video Boards, and new HP-HIL peripherals.
September 1987 ... Edition 4. Merged Update and revised for HP-UX 6.0.
May 1988 ... Update to include revisions for HP-UX 6.2 and addition of
peripherals.
December 1988 ... Edition 5. Revised for HP-UX 6.5. Includes all previous
updates.
September 1989 ... Edition 6. Revised for HP-UX 7.0. No longer contains
installation information for BASIC or Pascal workstations. Includes a subject
Index.
iii
Contents
1. Getting Started
Description . . . . . .
Support . . . . . . .
Before You Begin . . . .
Instructions . . . . . .
The Next Chapter . . .
HP-UX System Worksheets
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-4
2. Adding Expanders
HP 98568A Backplane Expander
Description and Support . .
Installation Procedure . . .
HP 98577A VMEbus Expander .
Description and Support . .
Installation Procedure . . .
Verification Test . . . . .
Adding VMEbus Cards . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-11
2-11
2-12
2-22
2-22
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-6
3-8
3-9
3-11
3-14
3-15
3-18
3. Adding RAM
Description and Support . . . . . . . .
Before Starting the Installation . . . . . .
The Expander . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing RAM Boards in a Model 320 Computer
.
Help with the Memory Configuration Wheel
Some Common Mistakes . . . . . . .
Installing RAM Boards in a Model 330 Computer
Optimizing Model 330 Performance . . . .
Installing RAM Boards in a Model 350 Computer
Identifying Existing RAM Boards . . . .
. . . . . . .
Assigning the Addresses
Contents-1
An Example
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the RAM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Case of Trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Adding Accessory Cards
HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator
Description and Support . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . .
The Expander . . . . . . .
. . . . . .
The System Bus
With a System Bus . . . . .
Without a System Bus . . . .
HP 98248B Floating-Point Accelerator
Description and Support . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . .
Models 330 and 360 . . . . .
Model 370 . . . . . . . . .
HP 98556A 2D Graphics Accelerator .
Description and Support . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . .
HP 98620B DMA Controller Card . .
Description and Support . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . .
HP 98635A Floating Point Math Card
Description and Support . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5. Adding Interface Cards
HP 98287A Graphics Display Station Interface
Description and Support . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . .
HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface .
Description and Support . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . .
Contents-2
3-20
3-22
3-26
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-11
4-11
4-11
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-15
4-15
4-16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-8
5-9
5-9
5-10
5-13
HP 98622A GPIO Interface . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-UX Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98624A HP-IB Interface . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98625A Disk Interface . . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98625B Disk Interface . . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98626A RS-232C Interface . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98627A Color Output Interface . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-UX Notes . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98628A Datacomm Interface . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98629A SRM Interface HP 50961A SRM Interface
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-14
5-14
5-15
5-20
5-21
5-21
5-22
5-22
5-23
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-28
5-29
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-33
5-34
5-38
5-39
5-40
5-40
5-41
5-48
5-49
5-50
5-50
5-51
5-54
5-55
5-55
5-56
5-56
5-57
5-63
5-64
5-65
Contents-3
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-UX Notes . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-UX Notes . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Video Boards . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98724A/98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-65
5-66
5-66
5-67
5-67
5-68
5-68
5-69
5-73
5-74
5-75
5-75
5-76
5-76
5-77
5-77
5-78
5-78
5-79
5-83
5-84
5-85
5-85
5-86
5-93
5-94
5-95
5-95
5-96
5-100
5-101
5-101
5-102
5-106
5-107
5-107
5-108
5-117
HP-UX Notes . . .
HP 98726A Interface Card .
Description and Support
Installation Procedure .
. .
Worksheet Entries
Using DIO-I . . . .
Using DIO-II . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-117
5-119
5-119
5-120
5-124
5-124
5-126
6. Adding Mass Storage Devices
Determining HP-UX Minor Numbers . . . . . . . .
HP Series 6100 Model 600/A HP-IB CD-ROM Drive . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP Series 6300 Model 20GB/A Optical Disk Library System
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
HP Series 6300 Model 650/A Optical Disk Drive . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7907A Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7911, 7912, and 7914 Disk/Tape Drives . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7933/7935 Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7936H/7937H Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7941, 7942, 7945, 7946 Disk and Disk/Tape Drives . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-6
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-9
6-10
6-13
6-14
6-14
6-15
6-18
6-20
6-20
6-21
6-27
6-30
6-30
6-31
6-34
6-36
6-36
6-37
6-41
6-42
6-42
Contents-5
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7957A/7958A Disk Drives . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7974A Tape Drive . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7978A Tape Drive . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 9121/9122 Flexible Disk Drives . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 9125S/9127A Flexible Disk Drives . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 9144A Tape Drive . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 9153A/9154A Disk Drives . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7957/58/59B and 7961/62/63B Disk Drives
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
Contents-6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-43
6-46
6-48
6-48
6-49
6-51
6-53
6-53
6-54
6-56
6-59
6-59
6-60
6-62
6-65
6-65
6-66
6-68
6-71
6-71
6-72
6-74
6-76
6-76
6-77
6-80
6-87
6-87
6-88
6-91
6-93
6-93
6-94
6-97
6-104
6-104
6-105
6-107
HP 7957/58/59S SCSI Disk Drives . .
Description and Support . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . .
. . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
Description and Support . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . .
. . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7. Adding Printers
HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer . . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 2227A/B QuietJet Plus and 2228A QuietJet Printers
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
Spooled Printing . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 2563B, 2564B and 2566B Printers . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 2684 LaserJet 2000 Printer . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
Spooled Printing . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 2686A/D LaserJet HP 33440A LaserJet-II HP 33447A
LaserJet-IID Printer . . . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
Spooled Printing . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 2932A and 2934A Printers . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-109
6-109
6-110
6-112
6-113
6-113
6-114
6-116
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-6
7-8
7-8
7-9
7-12
7-12
7-15
7-15
7-16
7-18
7-20
7-20
7-21
7-23
7-23
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-26
7-26
7-27
7-29
7-29
7-33
7-33
7-34
7-38
Contents-7
HP 3630A PaintJet Printer
Description and Support
Installation Procedure .
. .
Worksheet Entries
Spooled Printing . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-40
7-40
7-41
7-43
7-43
8. Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
HP Plotter (HP-IB Interface) . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 9111A Graphics Tablet . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
. .
HP 98700 Graphics Display Station
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 13279B Color Monitor . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 98720A Graphics Display Station . .
Description . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 98730A Graphics Display Station . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
Using DIO-I . . . . . . . . .
Using DIO-II . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-6
8-8
8-8
8-9
8-11
8-12
8-12
8-13
8-15
8-17
8-17
8-18
8-20
8-21
8-21
8-22
8-23
8-25
8-25
8-26
8-27
8-27
8-28
Contents-8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9. Adding Terminals and Displays
HP Terminals . . . . . .
Description and Support .
Installation Procedure . .
. . .
Worksheet Entries
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-3
9-3
9-4
9-12
10. Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 35723A HP Touch Bezel . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
. .
HP 37212A 300/1200 Baud Modem
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 45911A Graphics Tablet . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46020/21 Keyboards . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46060A/B Mouse . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46080A Extension Module . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46081A Speaker Module . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46082A/B Remote Extension Modules
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10-2
10-2
10-3
10-9
10-10
10-10
10-11
10-13
10-16
10-16
10-17
10-18
10-19
10-19
10-20
10-21
10-22
10-22
10-23
10-24
10-25
10-25
10-26
10-27
10-28
10-28
10-29
10-31
10-32
10-32
10-33
Contents-9
Worksheet Entries
. . . . . . . . .
HP 46083A Rotary Control Knob . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46084A ID Module . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46085A Control Dials Module . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
. . . . . . . .
HP 46086A Button Box
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46087/88A Digitizers and HP 46089A Cursor
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46094A Quadrature Port . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem 1200 . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 92916A Bar Code Reader . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
Index
Contents-10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10-35
10-36
10-36
10-37
10-38
10-39
10-39
10-40
10-41
10-42
10-42
10-43
10-44
10-46
10-46
10-47
10-48
10-49
10-49
10-50
10-51
10-52
10-52
10-53
10-55
10-56
10-56
10-57
10-59
10-62
10-62
10-63
10-65
Contents
1. Getting Started
Description . . . . . .
Support . . . . . . .
Before You Begin . . . .
Instructions . . . . . .
The Next Chapter . . .
HP-UX System Worksheets
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-4
Contents-1
1
Getting Started
Description
This manual describes how to add many common peripherals and accessories to
your HP Series 300 computer system. Installation instructions are provided for:
■ Interface and accessory cards
■ Disk and tape drives
■ Printers
■ Plotters and other graphics devices
■ HP-HIL devices
■ Additional monitors
■ Terminals
■ Modems
■ Miscellaneous peripherals
Support
A section called “Description and Support” precedes the installation
instructions for each peripheral presented in this manual. There is a table
in each “Description and Support” section that presents the HP-UX release
number and computer model that supports the peripheral. Do not attempt
to install a peripheral or accessory unless it is supported on your particular
computer.
Getting Started
1-1
The support information contained in this manual was accurate at the time of
printing. However, support status for peripherals and accessories may change
rapidly, and new peripherals, or peripherals not listed as supported at the
time of this printing, may be supported at a later date.
The information in the tables in the “Worksheet Entries” sections is used in a
device file. There is information about device files in the Series 300 HP-UX
System Administration Tasks manual.
For up-to-date support status on peripherals of interest, contact your HP Sales
and Service office.
Before You Begin
Refer to the instructions that came with your computer to:
■ Connect the keyboard to your computer.
■ Connect the monitor to your computer.
1-2
Getting Started
Instructions
This book contains 10 Chapters; each chapter is marked with a tab. Follow the
chapters in sequence until you run out of things to install, or you run out of
chapters, whichever comes first.
If you find no instructions in this guide for your particular peripheral, use the
installation instructions provided with the peripheral to install it. However,
look for “generic” installation instructions (e.g., “Installing Other Disk Drives”)
if your peripheral is not explicitly listed.
The Next Chapter
You have just completed Chapter 1, “Getting Started”. Now move on to
Chapter 2, “Backplane Expanders”.
Getting Started
1-3
HP-UX System Worksheets
Table 1-1.
Interface Cards
Interface Name
Select Code
Table 1-2.
Mass Storage Devices
Device Name
1-4
Getting Started
Path Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
Interleave
Factor
Table 1-3.
Printers
Device Name
Path Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
Major
Number
Minor
Number
Table 1-4.
Plotters/Graphics Devices
Device Name
Path Name
File
Type
Getting Started
1-5
Table 1-5.
Miscellaneous Peripherals
Device Name
Path Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
Power
Req.
Table 1-6.
Terminals & Displays
Device Name
1-6
Getting Started
Path Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
Contents
2. Adding Expanders
HP 98568A Backplane Expander
Description and Support . .
Installation Procedure . . .
HP 98577A VMEbus Expander .
Description and Support . .
Installation Procedure . . .
Verification Test . . . . .
Adding VMEbus Cards . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-11
2-11
2-12
2-22
2-22
Contents-1
2
Adding Expanders
■ HP 98568A Backplane Expander
■ HP 98577A VMEbus Expander
Are You Adding Any of the Above Expanders?
NO
Proceed to Chapter 3, “RAM Cards”.
YES
Refer to the table of contents on the previous page to
find where your installation instructions begin.
Adding Expanders
2-1
HP 98568A Backplane Expander
Description and Support
The HP 98568A Backplane Expander adds 8 additional I/O and Accessory slots
to your Series 300 computer.
HP 98568A Backplane Expander
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
2-2
on Release
with Model
3.1 or later
320
3.2 or later
330
350
Adding Expanders
Installation Procedure
HP 98568A Backplane Expander
1. Turn the computer power off and unplug the power cord from the rear panel.
2. Loosen the two captive screws securing the power supply access door on the
computer and remove the access door. You may need a Pozidriv screwdriver
to loosen the captive screws.
Figure 2-1.
Access Door Screws
3. Slide the computer top cover toward the rear of the computer. Then spring
the sides out and up and lift it off.
Adding Expanders
2-3
HP 98568A Backplane Expander
4. Install the two flat cables received with the expander into the two
connectors on the top edge of the computer’s four-slot backplane. Be
careful not to bend any of the pins in the connector. Press in until the
locking tabs lock across the back of the cable connector.
Figure 2-2.
Installing the Two Cables
5. Bend the cables so that the free ends point upward.
6. Loosen the two captive screws securing the expander power supply access
door and remove the access door.
7. Slide the computer top cover toward the rear of the computer. Then spring
the sides out and up and lift it off.
8. Place the expander upside-down on a fiat, solid surface.
2-4
Adding Expanders
HP 98568A Backplane Expander
9. Locate the two sliding clips on the top of the slotted cover and press them
toward each other as far as they will go.
Figure 2-3.
Sliding Clips
10. Place the slotted cover upside-down on the bottom of the expander, with
the front of the cover toward the front of the expander. The slot in the cover
should line up with the slot in the expander.
Adding Expanders
2-5
HP 98568A Backplane Expander
11. Align the top so that it is centered side-to-side.
Figure 2-4.
Aligning the Top from Side-to-Side
2-6
Adding Expanders
HP 98568A Backplane Expander
12. Align the top so that the rear edge of the cover is even with the rear edge of
the expander bottom. The indent at the front of the top should fit over the
plastic feet on the expander.
Figure 2-5.
Aligning the Top from Front-to-Back
Adding Expanders
2-7
HP 98568A Backplane Expander
13. Press the sliding clips onto the edges of the opening. Press the clips until
they “snap” into place.
Figure 2-6.
Pressing the Clips into Place
Note
If the sliding clips are difficult to install, make sure that the
top is properly aligned. If so, work on one end of the clips at a
time.
14. Turn the expander and attached cover over and place it on top of the
computer with the cables passing up through the slot in the bottom of the
expander.
2-8
Adding Expanders
HP 98568A Backplane Expander
15. Slide the top cover into place on the computer. Press in on the front edge
of the cover with the heels of your hands while pressing in on the rear
corners with your elbows.
Figure 2-7.
Installing the Cover on the Computer
16. Make sure that the bottom, rear corners of the top are seated in their
retaining clips. If you can flex the rear corners of the cover away from the
computer, they are not seated properly.
17. Install the two cables onto the bottom of the expander backplane. Be careful
not to bend any of the pins in the connector. Press in until the locking tabs
lock across the back of the cable connector.
18. Install the top cover removed from the computer onto the expander using the
method in step 15. Make sure that the bottom, rear corners of the top are
seated in their retaining clips.
19. Re-install the power supply access doors on the computer and expander and
tighten the captive screws. Make sure that the “feet” on the bottom of the
door are installed in their retaining grooves.
Adding Expanders
2-9
HP 98568A Backplane Expander
20. Refer to Chapter 3, “RAM Cards”, Chapter 4, “Accessory Cards”, arid
Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” of this manual to install various cards in the
expander. When you finish installing cards, don’t forget to connect the power
cords to the computer and expander.
INSTALLATION COMPLETE!
Do You Have Another Expander to Add?
2-10
NO
Proceed to Chapter 3, “RAM Cards”.
YES
Refer to the table of contents for this chapter to find
where your next installation instructions begin.
Adding Expanders
HP 98577A VMEbus Expander
Description and Support
The HP 98577A Series 300 VMEbus Expander is a VME backplane which
conforms to the VITA C.1 specifications for bus protocol and physical format.
It consists of a chassis plus some code segments in HP-UX 6.0 and a Driver
Development Manual so you can write a custom driver for your application. It
holds any four of about 3000 aftermarket VME boards.
HP 98577A VMEbus Expander
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
6.0 or later
330
350
Adding Expanders
2-11
HP 98577A VMEbus Expander
Installation Procedure
1. Turn the computer off and remove the power cord.
2. Loosen the two captive screws securing the power supply access door on
the computer and remove the access door. You may need a #1 Pozidriv
screwdriver to loosen the captive screws.
Figure 2-8.
Power Supply Door Screws
2-12
Adding Expanders
HP 98577A VMEbus Expander
3. Check the Serial Number
SKIP?
If you have a Model 350 computer, skip to the next step. If you
have a Model 330 computer, you may need a new processor
board. To determine this, follow the instructions in this step.
Find the Serial Number, located on the sheet metal base just inside the
power supply access door of the computer. If the first four digits read 2740
or higher, the board will operate correctly with the VMEbus Expander. If
they are 2739 or lower, you will need a new processor board. Contact your
Sales and Service Office for a free replacement. Refer them to Service Note
98562A-1.
4. Check that the Voltage Select Switch is in the correct position for the
power supplied in your area. If you do not know what it should be, make
sure that it is set the same as your computer.
Figure 2-9.
Voltage Select Switch
5. Slide the computer top cover toward the rear of the computer. Then spring
the sides out and up, and lift it off.
Adding Expanders
2-13
HP 98577A VMEbus Expander
6. Remove the Pozidriv screw securing the Expander cover. It is located on the
top edge of the rear panel.
Figure 2-10.
Locating the Cover Screw
7. Remove the Expander cover and install it on the computer. Start the front
edge first, at a 45° angle.
Figure 2-11.
Installing the Cover
2-14
Adding Expanders
HP 98577A VMEbus Expander
8. Press the slotted cover down, then slide it forward. Make sure that the
bottom, rear corners of the top are seated in their retaining clips.
Figure 2-12.
Seating the Cover
9. Locate the screw supplied in the bag with the power cord and install it into
the front of the computer top.
Figure 2-13.
Installing the Flat-head Screw
Adding Expanders
2-15
HP 98577A VMEbus Expander
10. Turn the Expander upside-down and locate the protective plastic sleeves on
the backplane.
11. Remove the inner protective sleeve by sliding it out sideways.
Figure 2-14.
Removing the inner Sleeve
2-16
Adding Expanders
HP 98577A VMEbus Expander
12. Remove the outer protective sleeve by pinching it and rolling it forward.
Figure 2-15.
Removing the Outer Sleeve
Adding Expanders
2-17
13. Pick the Expander up and turn it right-side-up, holding it by the front and
rear panels.
Figure 2-16.
Lifting the Expander
14. Lower the Expander onto the computer, making sure that it is lined up frontto-back with your fingers and side-to-side visually.
Figure 2-17.
Aligning the Expander and Computer
2-18
Adding Expanders
15. Press the Expander onto the two guide posts, then gently press it onto the
connector.
16. Check to see that the connector is mating properly, then press the two
together. If excessive force is needed, the alignment is not correct.
17. Now locate the two captive screws which fasten the Expander to the
computer. They go through the Expander bottom and into the slotted top
cover.
Figure 2-18.
Connecting Screw Holes
18. Tighten the two screws with a large, flat-blade screwdriver. Make sure they
are tight, but don’t overtighten them.
Adding Expanders
2-19
HP 98577A VMEbus Expander
19. Install the computer top cover on the Expander. Start the front edge first, at
a 45° angle.
Figure 2-19.
Installing the Cover
20. Press the cover down, then slide it forward. Make sure that the bottom, rear
corners of the top are seated in their retaining clips.
Figure 2-20.
Seating the Cover
2-20
Adding Expanders
HP 98577A VMEbus Expander
21. Re-install the power supply access doors on the computer and tighten the
captive screws. Make sure that the “feet” on the bottom of the door are
installed in their retaining slots.
22. Install the rear panel screw removed in step 6 on the Expander.
23. Connect the power cords to the computer and Expander. The combined units
are now ready for testing.
Adding Expanders
2-21
HP 98577A VMEbus Expander
Verification Test
1. With a small, flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the two captive screws on the
cover plate of slot 2 (that is, the second slot from the bottom), and remove
the cover plate.
Note
Do not loosen or remove any screws other than the captive screws
on the slot cover plates. Also, do not change the position of the
small RFI clips on the plates.
2. Turn power on to the Expander (but not to the computer).
3. A red LED located at the rear edge of the card in slot 1 should turn on and
remain on.
4. Turn the computer on. The LED in step 3 should now turn off and remain
off. (If you boot HP-UX and have the VME driver installed, the LED
should come on again).
5. If these two don’t happen, try again.
Adding VMEbus Cards
The VMEbus Expander adheres to the specifications established by the
VMEbus International Trade Association (VITA), revision C.1. VMEbus
accessories which do not adhere to the VITA C.1 specification are not
guaranteed to operate properly, if at all, in the VMEbus Expander.
Refer to the installation information that came with your VMEbus cards to
properly install them in the VMEbus Expander.
INSTALLATION COMPLETE!
Do You Have Another Expander to Add?
2-22
NO
Proceed to Chapter 3, “RAM Cards”.
YES
Refer to the table of contents for this chapter to find where your
next installation instructions begin.
Adding Expanders
Contents
3. Adding RAM
Description and Support . . . . . . . .
Before Starting the Installation . . . . . .
The Expander . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing RAM Boards in a Model 320 Computer
.
Help with the Memory Configuration Wheel
Some Common Mistakes . . . . . . .
Installing RAM Boards in a Model 330 Computer
Optimizing Model 330 Performance . . . .
Installing RAM Boards in a Model 350 Computer
Identifying Existing RAM Boards . . . .
. . . . . . .
Assigning the Addresses
An Example . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the RAM Board . . . . . . . .
In Case of Trouble . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-6
3-8
3-9
3-11
3-14
3-15
3-18
3-20
3-22
3-26
Contents-1
3
Adding RAM
■ HP 98254A (64 Kbyte) RAM card
■ HP 98256A (256 Kbyte) RAM card
■ HP 98257A (1 Mbyte) RAM card
■ HP 98258A (4 Mbyte) parity RAM
controller board
■ HP 98258B (4 Mbyte) parity RAM
add-on board
■ HP 98258C (12 Mbyte) parity RAM
add-on board
■ HP 98264A (8 Mbyte) Error Cheeking
and Correcting (ECC) RAM card
■ HP 98264B (16 Mbyte) Error Checking
and Correcting (ECC) RAM card
Are You Adding Any of the Above RAM cards?
NO
Proceed to Chapter 4, “Accessory Cards”.
YES
Check the next page for supportability for that
RAM with your computer, then refer to the table of contents
on the previous page to find where the RAM installation
instructions begin for your Series 300
computer.
Adding RAM
3-1
Description and Support
RAM cards add additional program memory to your computer. The maximum
amount Table 3-1 and Table 3-2 show you the possible combinations of
computer model, maximum RAM, and HP-UX supported RAM cards.
Table 3-1.
Maximum Installable RAM
on Model
Mbytes RAM
320
7 1/2
330
8
350
32*
48**
48***
*
parity RAM
**
ECC RAM
***
combined ECC and parity RAM
Table 3-2.
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
3-2
Adding RAM
RAM Card
on Model
HP 98256A
HP 98257A
320
HP 98258A
330
350
HP 98258B/C
350
HP 98264A/B
350
Before Starting the Installation The Expander
If your system does not already include an HP 98570A Backplane Expander,
you may need to install and configure one in order to use this product. If you
already have one, skip down to the next section.
Obviously, if all of the backplane slots in your computer are full, you will need
an expander. If you need to install an expander, do not do so until you have
turned the computer off in order to install the RAM hardware. Skip the rest of
this section.
If you have a Model 350 computer, you will need an expander if either of these
statements is true:
■ Your video output board consists of two printed-circuit boards
■ You have a total of more than four large boards.
If this condition exists, you will need an expander. If you do not know whether
your video board contains two printed-circuit boards, check it by loosening the
two screws securing it and sliding it out of the computer (make sure that your
operating system is shut down and the computer turned off, first).
Adding RAM
3-3
Installing RAM Boards in a Model 320 Computer
This procedure describes how to install RAM cards in Series 300 Model 320
computers. If yon have a Series 300 Model 330 or 350 computer, refer to the
following sections.
In this procedure, you will set the switches on each of your HAM cards to a
unique setting. No two RAM cards may have their switches set the same way.
1. Follow the directions on the Series 300 Memory Configuration Wheel to set
the switches on your RAM cards.
HELP?
Refer to the following section, “Help with the Memory
Configuration Wheels.”
2. Once you have completed all instructions on the Memory Configuration
Wheel, turn the computer on and check the number of bytes displayed on
the screen. This number should be approximately equal to the total number
of bytes of RAM you have installed in your computer. Count:
■ 1 048 000 bytes for each 1 Mbyte card you installed
■ 256 000 bytes for each 256 Kbyte card you installed
■ 64 000 bytes for each 64 Kbyte card you installed
3-4
Adding RAM
Installing RAM in a Model 320
3. If the number of bytes shown on the screen is:
■ More than you expected: don’t be concerned—your computer probably
contains some built-in RAM.
■ Slightly less than you expected: don’t be concerned—your computer
consumes a few hundred bytes of RAM as overhead.
■ Significantly less than you expected: repeat this procedure, and check for
an increase in bytes after each card is installed.
4. Replace all cover plates on the back of your computer.
Note
You have now installed your RAM cards.
You are now ready to install the peripherals, if any, in
Chapter 4, “Accessory Cards”. If you have installed all of
your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX
operating system.
Adding RAM
3-5
Installing RAM in a Model 320
Help with the Memory Configuration Wheel
This section provides advice for using the Memory Configuration Wheels. If
you have trouble following a step, look up the step in this section and read the
explanation.
Step 2-b
Unscrew and remove the painted cover plates from the back
of your computer. If your computer also has an interface
card installed (i.e., a painted cover plate with a circuit board
attached), remove this also—it may be covering a RAM card.
Do not unscrew the unpainted, silver cover plates at the
bottom of a Series 300 computer.
Once the cover plates are off, you may see some cards inside.
Decide which of these cards are RAM cards by looking at the
colors of their plastic extractor levers:
Green and violet extractor levers identify a 1 Mbyte RAM
card.
Red and yellow extractor lever identify a 256 Kbyte RAM
card.
Two red extractor levers identify a 64 Kbyte RAM card.
Remove all 1 Mbyte, 256 Kbyte and 64 Kbyte RAM cards by
pulling their extractor levers toward you and sliding them out.
RAM cards may be damaged by static discharge, so be careful
not to touch the electrical components on the cards, and don’t
place them on a charged surface such as a carpet or cloth.
Step 2-d
If your screen remains blank, write down 0 and go on to Step
3.
Step 2-e
The Bytes window is immediately below Step 2 on the wheel.
Turn the wheel until the number shown in the Bytes window
approximates the number you wrote down in Step 2-d.
Step 3
Repeat this step for each 1 Mbyte RAM card you have. Do
not go on to Step 4 until you have set the switches on all of
your 1 Mbyte RAM cards.
3-6
Adding RAM
Memory Configuration Wheel
Step 3-c
Turn the wheel until the next set of switches comes into view.
Whenever you are told to turn the wheel, always turn the wheel
to the next set of switches.– never use a set of switches that is
already in view.
For example, if you come to this step and a set of switches
already appears in the window, you should turn the wheel past
this set of switches and on to the next one. If you come to
this step and an arrow appears in the window or the window is
blank, you should turn the wheel until a set of switches comes
into view.
Step 3-d
Set the switches on the RAM card to match those shown in
the window.
Step 3-c
If you have additional 1 Mbyte RAM cards, begin again at
Step 3-b to set the switches on the next 1 Mbyte RAM card.
Remember to turn the wheel to the next set of switches when
you repeat Step 3-c.
If you have set the switches on all of your 1 Mbyte RAM cards,
make sure your computer is turned off and re-insert all 1
Mbyte RAM cards into your computer. You may insert them
into any slot, but be sure you do not use a slot which was
previously occupied by an interface card (if you have one).
Step 4-b
Check that the number of bytes now shown on the screen has
increased over the number you wrote down in Step 2-d.
Step 4-c
Turn the wheel clockwise until the number in the Bytes
window approximates the number of bytes you see on the
screen. If the number in the Bytes window is already be set
correctly, you do not have to turn the wheel.
Step 5-c
(Series 300)
See the advice for Step 3-c. Be sure you turn the wheel
counter clockwise as indicated by the arrows on the edge of the
wheel.
Adding RAM
3-7
Memory Configuration Wheel
Some Common Mistakes
If something goes wrong, watch out for these common mistakes:
■ Whenever you are told to turn the wheel, be sure to turn it, even if a set of
switches already appears in the window. Never use a set of switches unless
you have just turned the wheel to bring it into view. Remember, no two RAM
cards can have the same switch setting.
■ When you use the back side of the wheel, don’t forget to turn it counter
clockwise, rather than clockwise.
3-8
Adding RAM
Installing RAM Boards in a Model 330 Computer
This procedure describes how to install an HP 98258A RAM board in your
Series 300 Model 330 computer. If you have a Series 300 Model 320 computer,
refer to the preceding section. If you have a Series 300 Model 350 computer,
see the following section.
Caution
RAM boards can be easily damaged by static electricity. Be
careful to handle them only by their edges and make sure you
do not place them on a static-charged surface, such as a cloth
or carpet. If possible, use a static-free workstation or place
them on the anti-static envelope they were shipped in.
1. Carefully unpack your new RAM board.
2. Place your new RAM board, component-side up, on a static-free surface (e.g.,
the envelope your new RAM board was shipped in).
3. Set the switches on your new RAM board as shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1.
Setting switches on the new HP 98258A RAM board
Adding RAM
3-9
Installing RAM in a Model 330
4. Remove the cover plates on the back of your computer until you find a
vacant slot.
5. Insert the new RAM board, component side up, into the vacant slot. Place
the grey and green extractor levers against the board and push firmly until
the board is securely seated in the backplane.
6. Replace the cover plates on the back of your computer.
7. Turn your computer on and hold down the space bar a few seconds.
Check the display to make sure the amount of RAM in your computer has
increased to approximately 8 Mbytes (8 338 608 bytes). See Figure 3-2. If
the memory reported is significantly less, check that the switches for your
built-in RAM are set as shown in Figure 3-3. Then double-check that your
new RAM board’s switches are set as shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-2.
Display showing amount of RAM installed
3-10
Adding RAM
Installing RAM in a Model 330
Figure 3-3.
Built-in RAM switch settings
Optimizing Model 330 Performance
The BASIC, Pascal and HP-UX operating systems occupy different areas of
memory. Because programs occupying built-in RAM run faster than programs
occupying add-on RAM, you may want to rearrange memory so that your most
important programs occupy the fast, built-in RAM.
Here’s what to do:
1. Select a program to use as a benchmark, or choose a commonly-used
operating system function.
2. Run and time the benchmark program several times to determine its average
execution time under the current RAM configuration.
3. Turn your computer off.
Adding RAM
3-11
Installing RAM in a Model 330
4. Remove the HP 98258A add-on RAM board. Reverse the switch settings of
your add-on RAM board and your built-in RAM. When done, your built-in
RAM should be set to:
and your add-on RAM board should be set to:
5. Re-insert your add-on RAM board into the computer.
6. Turn your computer on and hold down the space bar a few seconds. Verify
that you still have 8 Mbytes of RAM installed by looking at the amount of
RAM shown on the display.
7. Run your benchmark program several times to determine its average execute
time.
8. Compare the program’s performance under each RAM configuration and
choose the fastest one.
3-12
Adding RAM
Installing RAM in a Model 330
Note
You have now installed your RAM cards.
You are now ready to install the peripherals, if any, in
Chapter 4, “Accessory Cards”. If you have installed all of
your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX
operating system.
Adding RAM
3-13
Installing RAM Boards in a Model 350 Computer
This procedure describes how to install HP 98258A/B/C and 98264A/B boards
in your Series 300 Model 350 computer. If you have a Series 200 computer, or
a Series 300 Model 310, 320, or 330, refer to the proceeding sections.
Before turning the computer off, invoke the power-up display (by doing a
Reset).
Power-up Display
Write down the amount of RAM listed:_____________Bytes. You will use
this figure later to check that the new RAM board is correctly installed.
Now, shut down the operating system following normal HP-UX procedures
(refer to your System Administrator Manual if you need more information).
Although installing RAM boards in the Model 350 is an easy task, it is broken
down into three short pieces for your convenience:
1. Identifying which RAM boards are already in the computer.
2. Assigning the RAM board addresses.
3. Physically installing the new RAM board in the computer.
3-14
Adding RAM
Installing RAM in a Model 350
If you already know which RAM boards your computer contains, skip the section
on “Identifying Existing RAM Boards” and go to the section on “Assigning the
Addresses”.
If you know that your computer contains about 16 Mbytes of RAM (from the
power-up display), go directly to the section titled, “Installing the RAM Board”.
It includes all the information you will need to add the RAM board.
Identifying Existing RAM Boards
In order to properly address a new board, you need to know the sizes of the
boards already in the computer. If you already know what size boards are in the
computer, put their quantities in Table 3-3 and skip down to the section titled,
“Assigning the Addresses”.
Table 3-3.
RAM Board Inventory Table
Board Size
Quantity
16 Mbyte boards
8 Mbyte boards
4 Mbyte boards
If you do not know what sizes the RAM boards in your computer are, the
easiest way to determine this information is to look at the amount of RAM in
the power-up display (the figure you wrote down near the beginning of this
section) and compare it to the number of boards in the backplane.
Now remove the system bus interface board and look for boards fitting the
descriptions in Table 3-4:
Adding RAM
3-15
Installing RAM in a Model 350
Table 3-4.
RAM Board Identification
Extractor Colors
(Left-Right)
Configuration
Memory Size
Grey-Green
Single board
Two-board pair
4 Mbytes
8 or 16 Mbytes
Blue-Yellow
Two-board pair
8 or 16 Mbytes
Figure 3-4.
RAM Memory Board Extractors
If you have a large number of boards and are still unable to determine what
board sizes you have, you will have to use the part numbers of the boards.
Carefully remove each board from the computer and locate the part number.
It is located on the underside of the top board, immediately above the address
switches on the bottom board.
3-16
Adding RAM
Installing RAM in a Model 350
Figure 3-5.
Part Number Location
Identify the board size with this chart:
Table 3-5.
RAM Board Identification
Extractor Colors
Left-Right
Part Number
Memory Size
Grey-Green
none (Single board)
98258-66521
98258-66522
4 Mbytes
8 Mbytes
16 Mbytes
Blue-Yellow
98264-66521
98264-66522
8 Mbytes
16 Mbytes
Put each board back into the computer when you have determined its size.
You may wish to label the boards with their size, as you will need this
information later.
When you have determined the sizes of all the RAM boards in the computer,
you are ready to assign the address to the boards. If your system contains
approximately 16 Mbytes in any combination, go directly to the section titled,
“Installing the RAM Board”. Otherwise, continue with the next section.
Adding RAM
3-17
Installing RAM in a Model 350
Assigning the Addresses
The general rule to follow when addressing the RAM is that any board must
be addressed higher in RAM space than any RAM board of smaller capacity
and below any larger RAM. In practice, RAM being added to a computer is
addressed below any existing RAM of the same size, in order to avoid having to
readdress existing RAM boards. You will have to readdress any smaller RAM
boards.
Although that is the general rule, there are some exceptions. For instance, if
you have a 16 Mbyte system made up of 4 and 8 Mbyte boards, they can be
treated as one 16 Mbyte board. The board to be added can then be addressed
as if it were being placed below an existing 16 Mbyte board.
Addressing new RAM boards as well as readdressing smaller existing RAM
boards are covered in this procedure.
1. Copy the numbers from the RAM Board Inventory Table (Table 3-3) to
Table 3-6.
Table 3-6.
RAM Board Inventory Table
Board Size
Quantity
16 Mbyte boards
8 Mbyte boards
4 Mbyte boards
2. For each 16 Mbyte board already installed in the computer, cross off four of
the 4 Mbyte blocks in Figure 3-6. Start with the first block and work down.
3-18
Adding RAM
Installing RAM in a Model 350
Figure 3-6.
Address Worksheet
3. If you are installing a 16 Mbyte RAM board, write the word “NEW” beside
the next UNUSED block, and cross off the following three blocks.
4. For each 8 Mbyte board in the computer, write the number “8” beside the
next UNUSED block and cross off the following one block.
5. If you are installing an 8 Mbyte RAM board, write the word “NEW” beside
the next UNUSED block, and cross off the following one block.
6. For each 4 Mbyte board in the computer, write the number “4” beside the
next UNUSED block.
Adding RAM
3-19
Installing RAM in a Model 350
7. If you are installing a 4 Mbyte RAM board, write the word “NEW” beside the
next UNUSED block.
An Example
If you would like to try out the addressing procedure before actually tackling
your situation, run through the following example.
The Situation:
You are adding a 16 Mbyte board to a computer already
containing a 16 Mbyte board, an 8 Mbyte board and a 4
Mbyte board.
Figure 3-7 shows how the 4 Mbyte block chart in Step 2 will look when you are
finished:
3-20
Adding RAM
Installing RAM in a Model 350
Figure 3-7.
Completed Address Worksheet
■ In Step 2, blocks 1 thru 4 were crossed out.
■ In Step 3, the word “NEW” was written by block 5 and blocks 6 thru 8 were
crossed out.
■ In Step 4, the number “8” was written by block 9 and block 10 was crossed
out.
■ In Step 6, the number “4” was written by block 11.
Adding RAM
3-21
Installing RAM in a Model 350
Installing the RAM Board
If you will be installing an expander, go ahead and do so, using the instructions
packaged with the expander.
If your computer contains a system bus, there are several configuration
restraints.
Both parity and ECC RAM are normally installed in the computer chassis,
since we strongly recommend that the RAM boards be connected to the
processor board by the system bus for maximum performance. However, both
RAM types may be installed in the expander if the resulting performance loss
is acceptable to you.
The 4 Mbyte parity RAM board may be installed in any slot. The other RAM
boards may be installed in any slot except for these:
■ the top slot of either the computer or expander
■ if your computer or expander contains DIO accessory slots (these are narrow
slots toward the top of the chassis), they can not go in the slot immediately
under the DIO slots.
Note
You may have to temporarily loosen or remove the board or slot
cover immediately above the empty slot in order to install the new
RAM board. Make sure to retighten this board after installing the
new board.
If your video output board consists of two printed circuit boards, it should go
in the expander.
The processor board, the RAM boards and the Floating-Point Accelerator (if
installed) should all be clustered together in the computer, in order to take
advantage of the faster speed of the system bus.
If your computer is full, a good general rule is to move the video board to the
expander.
Here is a step-by-step procedure for installing the new RAM board in your
computer:
1. Make sure that the computer and expander are turned off and the power
cords removed.
3-22
Adding RAM
Installing RAM in a Model 350
2.
Loosen the screws holding the system bus connector board and remove it.
Caution
In the following steps, handle the circuit boards as little as
possible. Handle them by the edges or backplate only.
3. Locate an empty system slot in the computer (or in the expander if you
have chosen to put the new RAM there) and remove the cover plate from
it.
4. If the empty slot is in the computer, check that it is immediately above or
below the system bus connector board. If not, rearrange the boards so that
it is.
5. Remove the new RAM board from its packaging material and place it on a
static-free surface, such as the bag it was shipped in.
6. Locate the RAM address switches.
Figure 3-8.
RAM Board Address Switch Location
7. If your system contains 16 Mbytes in any combination, set the address
switches on the new board according to Figure 3-9 and then skip down to
step 10:
Adding RAM
3-23
Installing RAM in a Model 350
Figure 3-9.
16 Mbyte Address Setting
8. If your system contains other than 16 Mbytes, set the address switches on the
new RAM board to match the block labelled “NEW”.
9. Now change the address switches on all SMALLER boards to the ones
numbered in the chart. “Smaller” refers to memory size rather than physical
size. Note that boards the same size as or larger than the new board need not
be changed. Only the smaller boards need new addresses.
10. Pick up the new RAM board by the edges and slide it into the empty slot.
Slide the two-connector end in first, with the board with the connectors on
the bottom.
11. If you installed the new RAM board in the expander, reinstall the cover plate
over the slot and reinstall the system bus connector board removed in step 2.
Then skip down to step 13.
12. Locate the new, larger system bus connector board packaged with the new
RAM board and carefully install it onto the processor board and RAM
board(s), and Floating-point Accelerator if installed.
3-24
Adding RAM
Installing RAM in a Model 350
Note
You MUST reinstall the system bus connector board to ensure
system performance, provide needed air cooling and meet
statutory requirements for fire safety and radiated emissions.
13. Reinstall the power cords and turn the computer and expander on.
14. Now check the power-up display for the amount of RAM installed.
Figure 3-10.
Power-up Display
Write the amount here _____________ Bytes.
15. If the amount of RAM in step 14 has not increased by approximately the
amount of RAM you added, go to the section titled “In Case of Trouble”.
16. Boot your HP-UX operating system as usual.
Your new RAM board is now installed.
Adding RAM
3-25
Installing RAM in a Model 350
In Case of Trouble
If you do not obtain the correct amount of available memory, first turn the
computer off and verify that the cards are plugged in correctly. Then turn it
back on and see if the amount of memory is correct. If it still is not, turn the
computer off and check the card addressing. If it is correct, set a card aside
and continue the process with the remaining cards.
If you still have trouble, verify that you have assigned the addresses correctly.
If you have, and no arrangement of cards will increase the amount of memory,
put the computer into use with the maximum amount of memory you can
obtain. Then replace all the unused cards in their anti-static bags and call your
HP Sales and Service office for assistance.
Note
You have now installed your RAM cards.
You are now ready to install the peripherals, if any, in
Chapter 4, “Accessory Cards”. If you have installed all of
your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX
operating system.
3-26
Adding RAM
Contents
4. Adding Accessory Cards
HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator
Description and Support . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . .
The Expander . . . . . . .
. . . . . .
The System Bus
With a System Bus . . . . .
Without a System Bus . . . .
HP 98248B Floating-Point Accelerator
Description and Support . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . .
Models 330 and 360 . . . . .
Model 370 . . . . . . . . .
HP 98556A 2D Graphics Accelerator .
Description and Support . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . .
HP 98620B DMA Controller Card . .
Description and Support . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . .
HP 98635A Floating Point Math Card
Description and Support . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-11
4-11
4-11
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-15
4-15
4-16
Contents-1
4
Adding Accessory Cards
■
HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator
■
HP 98248B Floating-Point Accelerator
■
HP 98556A 2D Graphics Accelerator
■
HP 98620B DMA Controller Card
■
HP 98635A Floating-Point Math Card
Are You Adding Any of the Above Accessory Cards?
NO
Proceed to Chapter 5, “Interface Cards”.
YES
Refer to the table of contents on the previous page to
find where your installation instructions begin.
Adding Accessory Cards
4-1
HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator
Description and Support
The HP 98248A Floating-Point Math board set provides HP Series 300 32-bit
computers with high-speed floating-point hardware.
HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.5 or later
330
350
360
370
Installation Procedure
Note
Installing the Floating-Point Accelerator involves two tasks:
■ preparing the operating system for the new hardware
■ physically installing the hardware.
This procedure describes how to install the hardware only.
For instructions on preparing the operating system to use the
hardware, refer to the installation note that came with the
Floating-Point Accelerator.
If your system does not already include a backplane expander, you may need to
install and configure one in order to use this product. If you already have one,
skip the next section.
If you know that you will need to install an expander, go ahead and do so,
using the instructions packaged with the expander. Then skip the next section.
The Expander
You will need an expander if either of these statements is true:
4-2
Adding Accessory Cards
HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator
1. You have no empty system slots in your computer.
2. Your video output board consists of two printed circuit boards.
If either of these conditions is true, you will need an expander, and the video
board must be placed in it. If you do not know whether your video board
contains two printed-circuit boards, check it by loosening the two screws securing
it and sliding it out of the computer.
The System Bus
The hardware installation process can take either of two paths, depending upon
whether your computer has a System Bus. An installation procedure for each is
presented here. Go to the correct procedure. For example, the Model 350 has a
System Bus, the Model 330 does not.
If you do not know whether your computer has a System Bus, look at the rear
panel of the computer. The System Bus is a metal plate covering two or more
slots. If your computer has such a plate, refer to the procedure titled, “With a
System Bus”. Otherwise, refer to the procedure titled, “Without a System Bus”.
With a System Bus
1. Make sure that the computer and expander are turned off and the power
cords removed.
Caution
In the following steps, handle the circuit boards as little as
possible. Handle them by the edges or backplate only.
2. Locate an empty system slot in the computer, either by moving the video
board to the expander or by removing the cover plate from an empty slot.
3.
Check that the empty slot is next to the System Bus. If it is not, rearrange
the boards so that it is.
4. Remove the Floating-Point Accelerator board set from the packaging material
and slide it into the empty slot. Slide the two-connector end in first, with the
board with the connectors on the bottom.
5. Loosen the screws holding the System Bus and remove it.
Adding Accessory Cards
4-3
HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator
6. Locate the new, larger System Bus packaged with the Floating-Point
Accelerator and install it onto the Accelerator, processor board and RAM
board(s).
Note
You must reinstall the System Bus to ensure system
performance, provide needed air cooling and meet statutory
requirements for fire safety and radiated emissions.
7. Reinstall the power cords and turn the computer and expander on.
Without a System Bus
1. Make sure that the computer and expander are turned off and the power
cords removed.
Caution
In the following steps, handle the circuit boards as little as
possible. Handle them by the edges or backplate only.
2. Locate an empty system slot in the computer, either by moving the video
board to the expander or by removing the cover plate from an empty slot.
3. Remove the Floating-Point Accelerator board set from the packaging
material and slide it into the empty slot. Slide the two-connector end in
first, with the board with the connectors on the bottom.
4. Reinstall the slot cover plate removed in step 2.
Note
You must install the slot cover plate to provide needed air
cooling and meet statutory requirements for fire safety and
radiated emissions.
5. Reinstall the power cords and turn the computer and expander on.
4-4
Adding Accessory Cards
HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator
INSTALLATION COMPLETE!
Do You Have Another Accessory Card to Add?
NO
Proceed to Chapter 5, “Interface Cards”.
YES
Refer to the table of contents for this chapter to find
where your next installation instructions begin.
Adding Accessory Cards
4-5
HP 98248B Floating-Point Accelerator
Description and Support
The HP 98248B Floating-Point Math board set provides HP Series 300 32-bit
computers with high-speed floating-point hardware.
HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
6.2 or later
330
360
370
Installation Procedure
Note
Installing the Floating-Point Accelerator involves two tasks:
■ preparing the operating system for the new hardware
■ physically installing the hardware.
This procedure describes how to install the hardware only.
For instructions on preparing the operating system to use the
hardware, refer to the installation note that came with the
Floating-Point Accelerator.
Expander
If your system does not already include a backplane expander, you
may need to install and configure one in order to use this product.
If you know that you will need to install an expander, go ahead
and do so, using the instructions packaged with the expander.
The hardware installation process can take either of two paths, depending
upon which computer you are installing the Accelerator in. An installation
procedure is presented here for the Models 330, 360, and 370. The HP 98248B
Accelerator is not supported in the Model 350.
4-6
Adding Accessory Cards
Models 330 and 360
HP 98248B Floating-Point Accelerator
1. Make sure that the computer and expander are turned off and the power
cords removed.
Caution
In the following steps, handle the circuit boards as little as
possible. Handle them by the edges or backplate only.
2. If you need to install an expander, do so at this point.
3. Check to see whether the bottom slot in the computer is empty. If it is,
remove the slot cover plate. If it is occupied, remove the board and place it
elsewhere in the computer or expander.
4. Remove the Floating-Point Accelerator board set from the packaging material
and slide it into the bottom slot. Slide the two-connector end in first.
5. Reinstall a slot cover plate over the Accelerator board.
Note
You must reinstall the System Bus to ensure system
performance, provide needed air cooling and meet statutory
requirements for fire safety and radiated emissions.
6. Reinstall the power cords and turn the computer and expander on.
7. Boot your HP-UX operating system as usual.
Model 370
Here is a step-by-step procedure for installing and Accelerator hardware in a
Model 370 computer:
1. Make sure that the computer and expander are turned off and the power
cords removed.
2. Loosen the screws holding the system bus and remove it.
Caution
In the following steps, handle the circuit boards as little as
possible. Handle them by the edges or backplate only.
Adding Accessory Cards
4-7
HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator
3. Check to see whether the bottom slot in the computer is empty. If it is,
remove the slot cover plate. If it is occupied, remove the board and place it
elsewhere in the computer or expander. If it is the processor board, place it
in the slot next to the bottom.
4. Remove the Floating-Point Accelerator board from the packaging material
and place it on top of the packaging material.
5. Locate the FPA Bus Cable. (Note: the cable may already be installed on
the Accelerator. If so, skip down to step 8.)
6. Locate the FPA Bus connectors on the Accelerator as shown in Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1. Floating-Point Accelerator Bus Connectors
7. Attach one end of the FPA Bus Cable to the connectors. Make sure that
the edge with the large notch is toward the side of the board, as shown in
Figure 4-2.
4-8
Adding Accessory Cards
HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator
Figure 4-2. Floating-Point Accelerator Bus Cable Positioning
8. Slide the Accelerator into the empty slot. Slide the end with the two DIO-II
connectors in first. Hold the FPA Bus Cable out so that it remains out of the
computer.
9. Rearrange the other boards in the backplane so that the processor board is
directly above the Accelerator and the RAM board(s) are directly above the
processor board.
10. Slide the processor board out about 1 inch.
11. Locate the FPA Bus Cable connectors on the processor board. They are
directly above the cable protruding from the Accelerator.
12. Wrap the FPA Bus Cable around the back of the processor board, and attach
it to the connectors on the processor board. The cable will become S-shaped,
as in the side view in Figure 4-3.
Adding Accessory Cards
4-9
HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator
Figure 4-3. Floating-Point Accelerator Connections (side view)
13. Slide the processor board back into the backplane.
14. Locate the new, larger system bus packaged with the Floating-Point
Accelerator and install it onto the Accelerator, processor board and RAM
boards(s).
Note
You must install the system bus to ensure system performance,
provide needed air cooling and meet statutory requirements for
fire safety and radiated emissions.
15. Reinstall the power cords and turn the computer and expander on.
16. Boot your HP-UX operating system as usual.
INSTALLATION COMPLETE!
Do You Have Another Accessory Card to Add?
4-10
NO
Proceed to Chapter 5, “Interface Cards”.
YES
Refer to the table of contents for this chapter to find
where your next installation instructions begin.
Adding Accessory Cards
HP 98556A
2D Graphics Accelerator
Description and Support
The HP 98556A 2D Graphics Accelerator is an add-on option for the HP 98549A
and HP 98550A Color Video Boards. It resides piggy back on the video board.
The board pair fits into one slot in the Series 300 computer or Direct-Connect
I/O Expander.
Note
If you have an HP 98264A/B ECC RAM card or an HP
98248A Floating-Point Accelerator card mounted in your
computer, the HP 98556A 2D Graphics Accelerator card must
be mounted in the Direct-Connect I/O Expander.
HP 98556A 2D Graphics Accelerator
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
6.0 or later
319C+
330
340
350
360
370
Installation Procedure
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
b. Remove the Graphics Accelerator from its envelope, being careful to
handle the card only by its non-connector edges. The card may be easily
damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
c. Place the card on its envelope, or use a static-free workstation, HP part
number 9300-0933..
Adding Accessory Cards
4-11
HP 98556A
2D Graphics Accelerator
2. Remove the video (RGB) cable from the video board.
3. Remove the video board and place it on a static-free surface.
4. Insert the Graphics Accelerator into the connector on the video board.
Make sure it is firmly seated.
5. Turn the board pair so that the video board is facing up and the
Graphics Accelerator is facing down. Insert and tighten the three screws
that correspond with stand-offs on the Graphics Accelerator. Then turn
the assembly over and insert and tighten the fourth screw in the hole
corresponding with the stand-off on the video board.
6. Install the board pair into the expander or computer. Make sure it is firmly
seated into the connector.
7. Connect the video cable.
8. Connect the power cord to the computer.
INSTALLATION COMPLETE!
Do You Have Another Accessory Card to Add?
4-12
NO
Proceed to Chapter 5, “Interface Cards”.
YES
Refer to the table of contents for this chapter to find
where your next installation instructions begin.
Adding Accessory Cards
HP 98620B
DMA Controller Card
Description and Support
The HP 98620B Direct Memory Access (DMA) Controller Card provides two
DMA channels for I/O transfer. This high speed I/O capability works with
GPIO, HP-IB and Disk interfaces to increase the maximum data exchange rate
between the computer and its peripherals.
After the computer sets up a direct memory transfer on the DMA Controller
Card, the controller handles the transfer without further intervention from the
computer. This frees the computer to do other things while the transfer
continues automatically at the fastest transfer rate possible.
HP 98620B DMA Controller Card
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
320
NOTE: Do not use this DMA card with models
other than the 320. Another DMA card,
the 98620C, is built into 32-bit models
like the 330, 350, and 360.
Installation Procedure
Note
The DMA Controller Card cannot be installed in an HP 9888A
Backplane Expander. It can be installed in an HP 98568A
Backplane Expander, however.
1. Turn your computer off.
2. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer until you
find an empty slot. Do not remove the silver cover plates on the bottom of a
Series 300 computer.
Adding Accessory Cards
4-13
HP 98620A
DMA Controller Card
3. Select an empty odd-numbered slot for the DMA Controller Card if one
is available; otherwise use an even-numbered slot. (Slots are numbered
from the top down, so the top-most slot is number 1, the next slot down is
number 2, etc.)
4. Insert the DMA Controller Card into the slot with the component side up.
Using your thumbs, push on the extractor levers until the card is firmly
seated in the backplane.
5. If you have additional cards to install in the backplane, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise replace the cover plates.
Verification Test
1. Turn your computer on and press the space bar a few times.
2. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the screen:
■ If the message, HP98620B, appears in the list, you have correctly installed
the DMA Controller Card.
■ If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure. If
the message still does not appear, call your HP Service Representative for
assistance.
INSTALLATION COMPLETE!
Do You Have Another Accessory Card to Add?
4-14
NO
Proceed to Chapter 5, “Interface Cards”.
YES
Refer to the table of contents for this chapter to find
where your next installation instructions begin.
Adding Accessory Cards
HP 98635A
Floating Point Math Card
Description and Support
The Floating Point Math Card (HP 98635A) enhances the performance of
your computer and supports the proposed IEEE standard for binary floating
point numbers. With this card, computational performance can be increased
up to three times. Actual performance is highly dependent on the application,
language, and operating system.
HP 98635A Floating Point Math Card
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
320
NOTE: Do not use this Math card with models
other than the 320.
Installation Procedure
Note
The Floating Point Math Card may be installed in the
HP 9888A Bus Expander, but with reduced performance.
Installation in an HP 98568A Backplane Expander will not reduce
performance.
1. Turn your computer off.
2. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer until you
find an empty slot. Do not remove the silver cover plates on the bottom of a
Series 300 computer.
3. Select an empty odd-numbered slot for the Floating Point Math Card if
one is available; otherwise use an even-numbered slot. (Slots are numbered
from the top down, so the top-most slot is number 1, the next slot down is
number 2, etc.)
Adding Accessory Cards
4-15
HP 98635A
Floating Point Math Card
4. Insert the Floating Point Math Card into the slot with the component side
up. Using your thumbs, push on the extractor levers until the card is firmly
seated in the backplane.
5. If you have additional cards to install in the backplane, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise replace the cover plates.
Verification Test
1. Turn your computer on and press the space bar a few times.
2. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the screen:
■ If the message, HP98635, appears in the list, you have correctly installed
the floating Point Math Card.
■ If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure. If
the message still does not appear, call your HP Service Representative for
assistance.
INSTALLATION COMPLETE!
Do You Have Another Accessory Card to Add?
4-16
NO
Proceed to Chapter 5, “Interface Cards”.
YES
Refer to the table of contents for this chapter to find
where your next installation instructions begin.
Adding Accessory Cards
Contents
5. Adding Interface Cards
HP 98287A Graphics Display Station Interface
Description and Support . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . .
HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface .
Description and Support . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . .
HP 98622A GPIO Interface . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . .
HP-UX Notes . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98624A HP-IB Interface . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . .
HP 98625A Disk Interface . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . .
HP 98625B Disk Interface . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-8
5-9
5-9
5-10
5-13
5-14
5-14
5-15
5-20
5-21
5-21
5-22
5-22
5-23
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-28
5-29
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-33
5-34
5-38
5-39
Contents-1
HP 98626A RS-232C Interface . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98627A Color Output Interface . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-UX Notes . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98628A Datacomm Interface . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98629A SRM Interface HP 50961A SRM Interface
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-UX Notes . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-UX Notes . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-40
5-40
5-41
5-48
5-49
5-50
5-50
5-51
5-54
5-55
5-55
5-56
5-56
5-57
5-63
5-64
5-65
5-65
5-66
5-66
5-67
5-67
5-68
5-68
5-69
5-73
5-74
5-75
5-75
5-76
5-76
5-77
5-77
5-78
5-78
5-79
5-83
5-84
HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
.
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Test . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Video Boards . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98724A/98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-UX Notes . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98726A Interface Card . . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
Using DIO-I . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using DIO-II . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-85
5-85
5-86
5-93
5-94
5-95
5-95
5-96
5-100
5-101
5-101
5-102
5-106
5-107
5-107
5-108
5-117
5-117
5-119
5-119
5-120
5-124
5-124
5-126
Contents-3
5
Adding Interface Cards
■ HP 98265A Small Computer Systems
Interface (SCSI)
■ HP 98627A Color Output Interface
■ HP 98287A Graphics Display Station
Interface
■ HP 98629A and HP 50961A SRM
Interfaces
■ HP 98546A Display Compatibility
Interface
■ HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution
Video Boards
■ HP 98562-66530 Human (System)
Interface Board
■ HP 98622A GPIO Interface
■ HP 98623A BCD Input Card
■ HP 98624A HP-IB Interface
■ HP 98625A Disk Interface
■ HP 98625B Disk Interface
■ HP 98626A RS-232C Interface
■ HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
■ HP 98633 Multiprogrammer Interface
■ HP 98640A Analog Input Card
■ HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer
Interface
■ HP 98643A LAN Interface
■ HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial
Interface
■ HP 98695A IBM 3270 Coax Interface
■ HP 98724A/25A Local Graphics Bus
Interface
■ HP 98726A Graphics Interface
Are You Adding Any of the Above Accessory Cards?
NO
Proceed to Chapter 6, “Mass Storage”.
YES
Refer to the table of contents on the previous page to
find where your installation instructions begin.
Adding Interface Cards
5-1
HP 98287A Graphics Display Station Interface
Description and Support
The HP 98287A Graphics Display Station Interface provides a connection
between the computer and the HP 98700 Graphics Display Station.
HP 98287A Graphics Display Station Interface
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
*
5-2
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all* Series 300
Supported on DIO-I hosts
Adding Interface Cards
Installation Procedure
HP 98287A Graphics Display Station Interface
Figure 5-1.
Graphics Display Station Interface switches
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
b. Remove the Graphics Display Station Interface from its envelope, being
careful to handle the card only by its edges and metal end plate. The card
may be easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
c. Place the card on the envelope.
2. Set the HP-HIL Select Code.
Adding Interface Cards
5-3
HP 98287A Graphics Display Station Interface
Note
The Graphics Display Station’s HP-HIL Interface is not
currently supported by any Series 300 operating system.
Therefore, you do not need to change the HP-HIL select
code switches (SW1), even if you have two Graphics Display
Stations. Leave them set to 31, as shown in Figure 5-1, and go
on to step 3.
3. Set the Frame Buffer Address.
SKIP?
If this is the first (or only) Graphics Display Station Interface
you are installing, you can skip to step 4. Your frame buffer
address is preset to $300000 (in hexadecimal), as shown in
Figure 5-1, and need not be changed.
a. Find the set of eight switches labeled SW2 on the Graphics Display
Station Interface (see Figure 5-1). Switches 1 and 2 in this group
determine the frame buffer address.
b. Set these switches to one of the following values, keeping these
restrictions in mind:
■ If you have both a Graphics Display Station and a Series 300
bit-mapped display, do not use frame buffer address $200000.
■ If you have a Model 320 computer, do not use frame buffer address
$800000 or $900000.
Figure 5-2.
4. Set the Addressing Mode
5-4
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98287A Graphics Display Station Interface
a. Find the set of eight switches labeled SW2 on the Graphics Display
Station Interface (see Figure 5-1). Switch 3 in this group determines the
addressing mode.
b. Set switch 3 as follows:
■ If you want to use the Graphics Display Station as the system console,
or if it is your only bit-mapped system display, set switch 3 to 0, as
shown in Figure 5-1 (see Important! note below). This places the
Graphics Display Station at internal address $560000 (in hexadecimal).
If you have two Graphics Display Stations, only one of them may be
set to internal addressing mode.
NOTE!
If you use internal addressing mode (switch 3 = 0), you cannot
also use a Series 300 bit-mapped display connected to an
HP 98542/43/44/45A video card. (You can use a monitor
connected to an HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface,
however.)
You must remove your HP 98542/43/44/45A video card. See
your Installation Reference manual for details.
To use both a Graphics Display Station and a Series 300
bit-mapped display, you must use external addressing mode
(switch 3 = 1) as indicated below.
■ To use the Graphics Display Station as a graphics output device only,
set switch 3 to 1, which is opposite the setting shown in Figure 5-1.
This places the Graphics Display Station at the external address (i.e.,
select code) specified in the next step.
5. Set the Graphics Display Station Select Code.
SKIP?
If this is the first (or only) Graphics Display Station you are
installing, you can skip to step 6. The select code is preset to 25
and need not be changed.
a. Find the set of eight switches labeled SW2 on the Graphics Display
Station Interface. Switches 4 through 8 in this group determine the
interface’s select code.
Adding Interface Cards
5-5
HP 98287A Graphics Display Station Interface
b. Set these switches to one of the four select codes given in Figure 5-3,
unless you have used them elsewhere. Refer to the installation note that
came with the interface if you need additional switch settings.
Figure 5-3.
6. Insert the Interface.
a. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer until
you find an empty even-numbered slot. (Slots are numbered from the top
down, so the top-most slot is number 1, the next slot down is number 2,
etc.) Do not remove the silver cover plates from the bottom of a Series
300 computer.
b. Insert the Graphics Display Station Interface, component side up, into
the empty even-numbered slot. Tighten the thumb screws on the metal
end plate until the end plate is flush with the back of the computer.
c. If you changed the select code of the Graphics Display Station Interface
in step 5, find this number in the set of select code labels supplied with
the interface. Affix this label to the metal end plate.
d. If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise, replace them.
7. Record the Select Code.
5-6
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98287A Graphics Display Station Interface
Make a note that select code 25 (or the alternate select code you chose in
step 5) and select code 31 have been used and are no longer available. Use
the “Select Code Record” form on the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab for
this purpose.
Note
Graphics Display Station installation is covered in Chapter 8,
“Graphics Devices”.
Adding Interface Cards
5-7
HP 98287A Graphics Display Station Interface
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the Graphics Display Station Interface.
The following table contains information needed to use the Graphics Display
Station Interface with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this select code to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you
need it. If you changed the select code in step 5-b, write in your new select code
instead of 25.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-1.
HP 98287A
Interface (Select Code 25)
Interface Name
HP 98287A
5-8
Adding Interface Cards
Select Code
25
HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface
Description and Support
The HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface converts digital display
data from Series 300 computers into a composite video signal which is
compatible with HP 35721, HP 35731, and HP 35741 monitors. It requires two
adjacent slots in the backplane and the lower slot must be an I/O card (i.e.,
even-numbered) slot.
The interface consists of two cards: a video card with an attached metal end
plate, and a graphics card that connects to the video card through a short
ribbon cable.
HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all* Series 300
NOTE: The display connected to the HP 98546
Interface must be the only display in the
system.
*
Not supported on the Model 318 or
Model 319.
Adding Interface Cards
5-9
HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface
Installation Procedure
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
b. Remove the Display Compatibility Interface from its envelope, being
careful to handle the card only by its edges and metal end plate. The
card may be easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
c. Place the card on the envelope.
Figure 5-4.
Display Compatibility Interface switches
2. Set the 50/60 Hz Switch.
SKIP?
This switch is preset to 60 Hz. If your power frequency is 60
Hz, or if you don’t know your power frequency, you can skip to
step 3. If you later notice a problem with your screen, come
back and change the Hz setting.
a. Find the 50/60 Hz switch on the video card (see Figure 5-4).
5-10
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface
b. Set the 50/60 Hz switch to the desired setting by referring to Figure 5-4.
3. Set the Character Select Switch.
SKIP?
If you are not using Japanese characters, you can skip to step
4. The character select switch is preset to ASCII/Roman 8 and
need not be changed.
a. Find the character select switch on the video card (see Figure 5-4).
b. Set the character select switch to ASCII/Roman 8 or ASCII/Katakana by
referring to Figure 5-4.
4. Insert the Interface.
a. If the graphics and video cards are not already connected together, plug
the ribbon cable connector on the graphics card cable into the matching
connector on the video card. The connector is designed so you cannot
insert it backwards.
b. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer
until you find two adjacent empty slots. The bottom slot must be an
even-numbered slot. (Slots are numbered from the top down, so the
top-most slot is number 1, the next slot down is number 2, etc.) Do not
remove the silver cover plates from the bottom of a Series 300 computer.
c. Hold the interface with the graphics card above the video card. Make
sure the components are facing up.
d. Keeping the graphics card slightly ahead of the video card, slide the cards
into adjacent accessory slots as shown in Figure 5-5.
Adding Interface Cards
5-11
HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface
Figure 5-5.
Installing the interface
e. Using your thumbs, press the graphics (top) card into its slot first. When
it is securely seated in its slot, its extractor levers will be even with the
back of the computer frame.
f.
5-12
Place the ribbon cable between the two cards, then tighten the thumb
screws on the metal end plate until the end plate is flush with the back of
the computer.
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the Display Compatibility Interface.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use the
Display Compatibility Interface with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to
the table for the system you’ll be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you need
it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-2.
98546A
Interface
Interface Name
HP 98546A
Select Code
-
Adding Interface Cards
5-13
HP 98622A GPIO Interface
Description and Support
HP 98622A General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Interface card is used for
a wide variety of peripheral requirements. It supports 16-bit bi-directional data
exchange. Extended control and status lines are available for applications that
require more than one signal from the computer. Several handshake modes are
also available to permit interfacing to a variety of equipment.
HP 98622A GPIO Interface
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
5-14
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Interface Cards
Installation Procedure
HP 98622A GPIO Interface
The GPIO Interface may be configured in any number of ways depending on
the requirements of your application. Abbreviated instructions are provided
here; refer to the installation manual that came with the interface if you need
more information.
Figure 5-6.
HP 98622A GPIO Switches and Jumpers
Adding Interface Cards
5-15
HP 98622A GPIO Interface
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
b. Remove the GPIO Interface from its envelope, being careful to handle
the card only by its edges and metal end plate. The card may be easily
damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
c. Place the card on the envelope.
2. Set the Select Code.
SKIP?
If this is the first (or only) GPIO Interface you are installing,
you can skip to step 3. The select code is preset to 12 and need
not be changed.
a. Find the set of five switches labeled U38 on the GPIO Interface (Figure
5-6). This group of switches determines the select code.
b. Set these switches to one of the four select codes given in Figure 5-7,
unless you have used them elsewhere. Refer to the installation note that
came with the interface if you need additional switch settings.
Figure 5-7.
3. Set Other Configuration Switches.
a. Set Interrupt Level switch, labeled U39 on the card, to interrupt level 3
(00) as shown in Figure 5-6 (interrupt level 3 is required for HP-UX). If
your application requires a different setting, refer to Table 5-3.
5-16
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98622A GPIO Interface
Table 5-3.
Interrupt
Level
Switch
1
Switch
0
3
0
0
4
0
1
5
1
0
6
1
1
b. Set the Data-in Clock Source switches (labeled U2). If connecting an HP
9884A Paper Tape Punch to this interface, set these switches as shown in
Figure 5-6.
The right-hand 3 switches set the clock source for the data input lines
DI0 through DI7. The left-hand 3 switches set the clock source for the
data input lines DI8 through DI15. Select only one clock source (logic 0)
for each group of input lines. The three clock sources are:
■ RD. This mode causes the data to be clocked into the input registerwhen the register is read. It accomplishes this by clocking the leading
edge of the output enable signal of the register.
■ BSY. This mode clocks the data into the data input register by a
ready-to-busy transition of the PFLG line. This transition also clears
the PCTL line.
■ RDY. This mode clocks the data into the data input register by a
busy-to-ready transition of the PFLG line.
c. Set the Option Select switches (labeled U1) by referring to Table 5-4. If
connecting an HP 9884A Paper Tape punch to this interface, set all of
these switches to 1.
Adding Interface Cards
5-17
HP 98622A GPIO Interface
Table 5-4.
Switch
Position
Name
Function
Logic 1
(Switch
Open)
Logic 0
(Switch
Closed)
DOUT
Invert
Data Out
Low = 1
High = 0
Low = 0
High = 1
DIN
Invert
Data In
Low = 1
High = 0
Low = 0
High = 1
HSHK
Full/Pulse
Handshake
Full
Pulse
PSTS
Invert
PSTS
Low = OK
High = OK
Low = OK
High = OK
PFLG
Invert
PFLG
Low = Rdy
High = Bsy
Low = Bsy
High = Rdy
PCTL
Invert
PCTL
Low = set
High = Clr
Low = Clr
High = Set
d. Install or remove the jumpers on your HP 98622A card(s) as required by
your peripheral.
■ DOUT CLEAR Jumper. With the jumper installed, both data output
registers are cleared at power up and after an interface reset. With the
jumper removed, contents of the register are undefined. The card is
shipped without the jumper. If you intend to use the HP 9884A Paper
Tape Punch with this interface, the jumper should be in.
■ BURST Jumper. With the jumper installed, there is better overall
system performance, but slightly slower GPIO performance on
high-speed transfers. With the removed, there is slightly degraded
overall system performance, but better GPIO performance for transfers
greater than 100K transfers/second. The card is shipped with the
jumper. If you intend to use the HP 9884A Paper Tape Punch with
this interface, the jumper should be removed.
5-18
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98622A GPIO Interface
e. Adjust the PCTL Delay if required. The PCTL line has a built in delay
of 250ns. To increase the delay, increase the value of C6 40pF per 100ns
of additional delay. To decrease the delay, decrease the value of R1 1.47k
ohms per 100ns of decreased delay.
4. Insert the Interface.
a. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer until
you find an empty even-numbered slot. (Slots are numbered from the top
down, so the top-most slot is number 1, the next slot down is number 2,
etc.) Do not remove the silver cover plates from the bottom of a Series
300 computer.
b. Insert the GPIO Interface, component side up, into the empty
even-numbered slot. Tighten the thumb screws on the metal end plate
until the end plate is flush with the back of the computer.
c. If you changed the select code of the GPIO Interface in step 2, find this
number in the set of select code labels supplied with the interface. Affix
this label to the metal end plate.
d. If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise, replace them.
5. Record the Select Code.
a. Make a note that select code 12 (or the alternate select code you chose
in step 2) has been used and is no longer available. Use the “Select Code
Record” form on the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab for this purpose.
Adding Interface Cards
5-19
HP 98622A GPIO Interface
Verification Test
1. Plug in the power cord and turn your computer on. If you have systems
on-line that the computer can boot, press the space bar a few times to
suspend the automatic booting process.
2. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the screen:
■ If the message, HP98622, appears in the list, you have correctly installed
the GPIO Interface.
■ If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure,
making sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly
seated in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear, call
your HP Service Representative for assistance.
5-20
Adding Interface Cards
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the GPIO Interface.
The following “Worksheet Entries” and HP-UX Notes contain information
needed to use the GPIO Interface with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you
need it. If you changed the select code in step 2-b, write in your new select code
instead of 12.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-5.
HP 98622A
GPIO Interface (Select Code 12)
Interface Name
HP 98622A
Select Code
12
HP-UX Notes
■ The character-mode major number for the Device I/O Library GPIO
Interface driver is 22.
■ The minor number for a GPIO Interface at select code 12 is 0x0c0000.
■ A typical mknod for a GPIO Interface at select code 12 is:
# mknod /dev/gpio c 22 0x0c0000
The 0c in the minor number represents select code 12 (0c is hexadecimal for
12).
Adding Interface Cards
5-21
HP 98624A HP-IB Interface
Description and Support
The HP 98624A HP-IB Interface card implements the IEEE 488-1978 Standard
Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation. The interface can
communicate with as many as 14 HP-IB compatible instruments, connected
with a maximum of 20 meters of cable (65.6 ft.). It has interrupt capabilities
and can carry out DMA transfers via the optional DMA Controller card.
It is a “normal” or “standard” speed HP-IB interface.
HP 98624A HP-IB Interface
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
5-22
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Interface Cards
Installation Procedure
HP 98624A HP-IB Interface
Figure 5-8.
HP 98624A HP-IB Interface switches
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
Adding Interface Cards
5-23
HP 98624A HP-IB Interface
b. Remove the HP-IB Interface from its envelope, being careful to handle
the card only by its edges and metal end plate. The card may be easily
damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
c. Place the card on the envelope.
2. Set the Select Code.
SKIP?
If this is the first (or only) HP 98624A HP-IB interface you are
installing, you can skip to step 3. The select code is preset to 8
and need not be changed.
a. Find the set of five switches labeled U1 on the HP-IB Interface (see
Figure 5-8). This group of switches determine the interface’s select code.
b. Set these switches to one of the four select codes given in Figure 5-9,
unless you have used them elsewhere. Refer to the installation note that
came with the interface if you need additional switch settings.
Figure 5-9.
3. Set the Interrupt Level.
SKIP?
The interface is preset to interrupt level 3. Unless you
are certain that interrupt level 3 is inappropriate for your
application, leave the interrupt level setting alone and skip to
step 4.
If you need to change the interrupt level, refer to Figure 5-8 and set the
switches labeled U2 according to Table 5-6:
5-24
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98624A HP-IB Interface
Table 5-6.
Interrupt
Level
Switch
1
Switch
0
3
0
0
4
0
1
5
1
0
6
1
1
4. Set the Address and System Controller Switches.
SKIP?
Unless you intend to connect two computers together with this
interface, you can skip to step 5. The interface is configured to
be system controller at address 21 and need not be changed.
a. If connecting two computers together via HP-IB, only one of them may
be set to address 21. To change the address of this interface, reset
switches 0 thru 4 in the group of switches labeled U17 (see Figure 5-8).
As an example, to change the address from the default setting of 21 to a
new setting of 20, just change switch 0 in this group to 0 (the opposite of
that shown).
b. If connecting two computers together via HP-IB, only one of them may
be set to system controller. To change this interface to non-system
controller, move the SYS CTL switch shown in Figure 5-8 to the 0
position (the opposite of that shown).
Note: If you will be connecting a disk drive, printer, plotter or other
peripheral to this interface, and you will be using an HP Series 200/300
operating system, do not set this switch to non-system controller.
5. Insert the Interface.
a. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer until
you find an empty even-numbered slot. (Slots are numbered from the top
down, so the top-most slot is number 1, the next slot down is number 2,
etc.) Do not remove the silver cover plates from the bottom of a Series
300 computer.
Adding Interface Cards
5-25
HP 98624A HP-IB Interface
b. Insert the HP-IB Interface, component side up, into the empty evennumbered slot. Tighten the thumb screws on the metal end plate until the
end plate is flush with the back of the computer.
c. If you changed the select code of the HP-IB Interface in step 2, find this
number in the set of select code labels supplied with the interface. Affix
this label to the metal end plate.
d. If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise, replace them.
6. Record the Select Code.
Make a note that select code 8 (or the alternate select code you chose in step
2) has been used and is no longer available. Use the “Select Code Record”
form on the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab for this purpose.
Verification Test
1. Plug in the power cord and turn your computer on. If you have systems
on-line that the computer can boot, press the space bar a few times to
suspend the automatic booting process.
2. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the screen:
■ If the message, HP98624, appears in the list, you have correctly installed
the HP-IB Interface.
■ If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure,
making sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly
seated in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear, call
your HP Service Representative for assistance.
5-26
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98624A HP-IB Interface
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the HP-IB Interface.
The following table contains information needed to use the HP-IB Interface
with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this select code to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you
need it. If you changed the select code in step 2-b, write in your new select code
instead of 8.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-7.
HP 98624A
HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
Interface Name
HP 98624A
Select Code
8
Adding Interface Cards
5-27
HP 98625A Disk Interface
Note
If you have an HP 98625B Disk Interface, see the next section.
Description and Support
The HP 98625A Disk Interface provides a high-speed HP-IB interface to
Command Set 80 (CS/80) disks. The Disk Interface is capable of handling up
to four disks on one interface card. A DMA Controller card is required for the
Disk Interface to achieve optimum performance.
HP 98625A Disk Interface
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
5-28
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev A. or later
Adding Interface Cards
Installation Procedure
HP 98625A Disk Interface
Figure 5-10.
HP 98625A Disk Interface switches
Note
The HP 98625A Disk Interface cannot be installed in the HP
9888A bus expander. It can be installed in the HP 98568A
Backplane Expander, however.
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
b. Remove the Disk Interface from its envelope, being careful to handle
the card only by its edges and metal end plate. The card may be easily
damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
Adding Interface Cards
5-29
HP 98625A Disk Interface
c. Place the card on the envelope.
2. Set the Select Code.
SKIP?
If this is the first (or only) HP 98625 (A or B) Disk Interface
you are installing, you can skip to step 3. The select code is
preset to 14 and need not be changed.
However, if you have the HP 98265A SCSI card, it also is
preset to Select Code 14, so you will need to continue with step
2 to change the select code on your HP 98625A Interface.
a. Find the set of five select code switches by referring to Figure 5-10.
b. Set these switches to one of the four select codes given in Figure 5-11,
unless you have used them elsewhere. Refer to the installation note that
came with the interface if you need additional switch settings.
Figure 5-11.
3. Set the Interrupt Level.
SKIP?
If you are not using HP-UX, you can skip to step 4. The
interrupt level is preset to 6 and need not be changed. If you
will be using HP-UX continue with step 3.
a. Find the Interrupt Level switches by referring to Figure 5-10.
b. If using HP-UX, set these switches to interrupt level 4 as shown in Figure
5-10. To get interrupt level 4, set the left switch to 0 and the right switch
to 1. Do not set any other interface to interrupt level 4.
4. Insert the Interface.
5-30
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98625A Disk Interface
a. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer until
you find an empty even-numbered slot. (Slots are numbered from the top
down, so the top-most slot is number 1, the next slot down is number 2,
etc.) Do not remove the silver cover plates from the bottom of a Series
300 computer.
b. Insert the Disk Interface, component side up, into the empty
even-numbered slot. Tighten the thumb screws on the metal end plate
until the end plate is flush with the back of the computer.
c. If you changed the select code of the Disk Interface in step 2, find this
number in the set of select code labels supplied with the interface. Affix
this label to the metal end plate.
d. If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise, replace them.
5. Record the Select Code.
Make a note that select code 14 (or the alternate select code you chose in step
2) has been used and is no longer available. Use the “Select Code Record”
form on the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab for this purpose.
Verification Test
1. Plug in the power cord and turn your computer on. If you have systems online that the computer can boot, press the space bar a few times to suspend
the automatic booting process.
2. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the screen:
■ If the message, HP98625, appears in the list, you have correctly installed
the Disk Interface.
■ If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure,
making sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly
seated in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear, call
your HP Service Representative for assistance.
Adding Interface Cards
5-31
HP 98625A Disk Interface
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the HP98625A Disk Interface.
The following table contain information needed to use the Disk Interface with
the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this select code to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you
need it. If you changed the select code in step 2-b, write in your new select code
instead of 14.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-8.
98625A
Disc Interface (Select Code 14)
Interface Name
HP 98625A
5-32
Adding Interface Cards
Select Code
14
HP 98625B Disk Interface
Note
If you have an HP 98625A Disk Interface, see the previous
section.
Description and Support
The HP 98625B Disk Interface provides a high-speed HP-IB interface to
Command Set 80 (CS/80) disks. The Disk Interface is capable of handling up
to four disks on one interface card. A DMA Controller card is required for the
Disk Interface to achieve optimum performance.
HP 98625B Disk Interface
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev A. or later
Adding Interface Cards
5-33
HP 98625B Disk Interface
Installation Procedure
Figure 5-12.
HP 98625B Disk Interface switches
Note
The HP 98625B Disk Interface cannot be installed in the HP
9888A bus expander. It can be installed in the HP 98568A
Backplane Expander, however.
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
b. Remove the Disk Interface from its envelope, being careful to handle
the card only by its edges and metal end plate. The card may be easily
damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
5-34
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98625B Disk Interface
c. Place the card on the envelope.
2. Set the Select Code.
SKIP?
If this is the first (or only) HP 98625 (A or B) Disk Interface
you are installing, you can skip to step 3. The select code is preset
to 14 and need not be changed.
However, if you have the HP 98265A SCSI card, it also is preset to
Select Code 14, so you will need to continue with step 2 to change
the select code on your HP 98625B Interface.
a. Find the set of nine switches by referring to Figure 5-12. Switches 1
through 5 in this group determine the select code.
b. Set these switches to one of the four select codes given in Figure 5-13,
unless you have used them elsewhere. Refer to the installation note that
came with the interface if you need additional switch settings.
Figure 5-13.
3. Set the Interrupt Level.
SKIP?
If you are not using HP-UX, you can skip to step 4. The
interrupt level is preset to 6 and need not be changed. If you
will be using HP-UX continue with step 3.
a. Find the set of nine switches by referring to Figure 5-12. Switches 6 and
7 in this group determine the interrupt level.
b. If using HP-UX, set these switches to interrupt level 4 as shown in
Figure 5-12. To get interrupt level 4, set the left switch to 0 and the
Adding Interface Cards
5-35
HP 98625B Disk Interface
right switch to 1. Do not set any other interface (except for the HP
98629A SRM Interface) to interrupt level 4.
4. Set the System Controller Switch.
SKIP?
Unless you intend to connect two computers together with this
interface, you can skip to step 5. The interface is configured to be
system controller and need not be changed.
a. Find the set of nine switches be referring to Figure 5-12. Switch 8 in this
group determines the system controller setting.
b. If connecting two computers together via HP-IB, only one of them may be
set to system controller. To change this interface to non-system controller,
move the system controller switch shown in Figure 5-12 to the 0 position
(the opposite of that shown).
Note: If you will be connecting a disk drive, printer, plotter or other
peripheral to this interface, and you will be using an HP Series 200/300
operating system, do not set this switch to non-system controller.
5. Set the Low/High Speed Switch.
SKIP?
The Low/High Speed switch is preset to 0, “high speed,” as
shown in Figure 5-12. This setting is appropriate for most
applications. If you want to change this setting, continue with
step 5; otherwise skip to step 6.
a. Find the set of nine switches by referring to Figure 5-12. Switch 9 in this
group is the Low/High Speed switch.
b. Set this switch as follows:
■ To set this switch to “low speed,” set switch 9 to 1, which is opposite
of that shown in Figure 5-12.
■ To set this switch to “high speed,” set switch 9 to 0 as shown in
Figure 5-12.
6. Insert the Interface.
5-36
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98625B Disk Interface
a. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer until
you find an empty even-numbered slot. (Slots are numbered from the top
down, so the top-most slot is number 1, the next slot down is number 2,
etc.) Do not remove the silver cover plates from the bottom of a Series
300 computer.
b. Insert the Disk Interface, component side up, into the empty
even-numbered slot. Tighten the thumb screws on the metal end plate
until the end plate is flush with the back of the computer.
c. If you changed the select code of the Disk Interface in step 2, find this
number in the set of select code labels supplied with the interface. Affix
this label to the metal end plate.
d. If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise, replace them.
7. Record the Select Code.
Make a note that select code 14 (or the alternate select code you chose in
step 2) has been used and is no longer available. Use the “Select Code
Record” form on the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab for this purpose.
Adding Interface Cards
5-37
HP 98625B Disk Interface
HP 98625B Disk Interface Verification Test
1. Plug in the power cord and turn your computer on. If you have systems online that the computer can boot, press the space bar a few times to suspend
the automatic booting process.
2. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the screen:
■ If the message, HP98625, appears in the list, you have correctly installed
the Disk Interface.
■ If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure,
making sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly
seated in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear, call
your HP Service Representative for assistance.
5-38
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98625B Disk Interface
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the HP98625B Disk Interface.
The following table contains information needed to use the Disk Interface with
the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this select code to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you
need it. If you changed the select code in step 2-b, write in your new select code
instead of 14.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-9.
Interface Name
HP 98625B
Select Code
14
Adding Interface Cards
5-39
HP 98626A RS-232C Interface
Description and Support
The HP 98626A RS-232C Interface is connected to a terminal, modem, serial
peripheral, or computer and supports the RS-232C standard. One interface is
required for each device, and each interface must be set to a unique select code.
HP 98626A RS-232C Interface
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
5-40
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Interface Cards
Installation Procedure
HP 98626A RS-232C Interface
Figure 5-14.
HP 98626A RS-232C Serial Interface Switches
Adding Interface Cards
5-41
HP 98626A RS-232C Interface
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
b. Remove the RS-232C Interface from its envelope, being careful to
handle the card only by its edges and metal end plate. The card may be
easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
c. Place the card on the envelope.
2. Set the Select Code.
SKIP?
If you have a Series 200 Model 220, 226, 236 or 237 computer,
and you have not already installed an HP 98626A or HP
98644A interface, then you can skip to step 3. The select code
is preset to 9 and need not be changed.
a. Find the set of five select code switches, labeled U24, by referring to
Figure 5-14.
b. Set these switches to one of the five select codes given below, unless you
have used them elsewhere (check the Select Code Record on the Chapter
5, “Interface Cards” tab to see which ones you have used). Refer to the
installation note that came with the interface if you need additional
switch settings.
Figure 5-15.
5-42
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98626A RS-232C Interface
3. Set the Interrupt Level.
a. Find the two interrupt level switches, labeled U20, by referring to
Figure 5-14.
b. If using HP-UX, set these switches to interrupt level 5 by setting
switch 0 to 0 and switch 1 to 1. The switches will look like the one in
Figure 5-16:
Figure 5-16.
4. Set the Baud Rate.
a. Find the four baud rate switches, labeled U1, by referring to
Figure 5-14.
b. Set the baud rate switches as follows:
■ If connecting an HP 2601A printer, an HP 39800/01A bar code
reader, or an HP 92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem 1200 to this
interface, set the baud rate switches to 1200. To get 1200 baud, set
switch 3 to 1, and set switches 2, 1 and 0 to 0. The switches will look
like the one in Figure 5-17:
Figure 5-17.
■ If connecting a terminal or an HP 2686 LaserJet printer to this
interface, set the baud rate switches to 9600. To get 9600 baud, set
Adding Interface Cards
5-43
HP 98626A RS-232C Interface
switches 3, 2 and 1 to 1, and set switch 0 to 0. The switches will look
like the one in Figure 5-18:
Figure 5-18.
■ If connecting any other device to this interface, set the baud rate
switches to match the baud rate of the device. See the installation
manual that came with the interface for all baud rate settings.
5. Set the Character Length.
SKIP?
The interface’s character length is preset to 8 bits/character.
Unless you are certain that this is inappropriate for your
application, leave the character length setting alone and skip to
step 6.
The character length switches, numbers 0 and 1 on the group labeled U2, are
preset to 8 bits/character, which is appropriate for most applications. If you
know you need to change the character length, refer to the manual that came
with the interface for additional settings.
6. Set the Number of Stop Bits.
SKIP?
The interface is preset to 1 stop bit. Unless you are certain
that 1 stop bit is inappropriate for your application, leave the
stop bit setting alone and skip to step 7.
The stop bits switch, number 2 on the group labeled U2, is preset to 1
stop bit, which is appropriate for most applications. If you know you need
to change the number of stop bits to 2, change this switch to its alternate
setting.
7. Set the Parity Enable Switch.
5-44
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98626A RS-232C Interface
a. Find the group of Line Control switches, labeled U2 on the interface,
by referring to Figure 5-14. Switch 3 in this group is the parity enable
switch.
b. Set the parity enable switch as follows:
■ If connecting a terminal or an HP 2686 LaserJet printer to this
interface, set this switch to “parity disabled.” To disable parity, set
switch 3 to 0 like this:
Figure 5-19.
■ If connecting an HP 39800/01A bar code reader or an HP 92205A/C
Hayes Smartmodem 1200 to this interface, set this switch to “parity
enabled.” To enable parity, set switch 3 to 1 like this:
Figure 5-20.
■ If connecting any other device to this interface, set this switch to
match that of the connected device.
Adding Interface Cards
5-45
HP 98626A RS-232C Interface
8. Set the Parity Type.
a. Find the Line Control switches, labeled U2 on the interface, by referring
to Figure 5-14. Switches 4 and 5 in this group determine the parity type.
b. Set the parity type switches as follows:
■ If connecting a terminal, HP 2601A printer or HP 2686 LaserJet printer
to this interface, the parity type does not matter since parity was
disabled in step 7. Skip to step 9.
■ If connecting an HP 39800/01A bar code reader, set this switch to
“parity is 0.” To set parity to 0, set both switches 4 and 5 to 1 like
this:
Figure 5-21.
■ If connecting an HP 92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem 1200 to this
interface, set the parity type to match the setting on the computer or
terminal you are communicating with. See the installation manual that
came with the interface for details.
9. Set the Handshake Type
a. Find the Line Control switches, labeled U2 on the interface, by referring
to Figure 5-14. Switches 6 and 7 in this group determine the handshake
type.
b. Set the handshake type switches to XON/XOFF. To get XON/XOFF, set
switch 6 to 1, and set switch 7 to 0 like this:
5-46
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98626A RS-232C Interface
Figure 5-22.
10. Set the Modem Line Switches.
a. Find the Modem Line switches, labeled U3 on the interface, by referring
to Figure 5-14.
b. Set these switches as follows:
■ If connecting a modem, HP 2686A LaserJet printer, or uucp to this
interface, set these switches to the “Connected” position as shown in
Figure 5-14.
■ If connecting a terminal or bar code reader, set these switches to the
“Always on” position, which is opposite that shown in Figure 5-14.
11. Set the Remote Jumper.
SKIP?
Unless you want to connect your system console terminal to
this interface, you can skip to step 12.
a. Find the remote keyboard jumper by referring to Figure 5-14.
b. If you are connecting a terminal to this interface and would like the
terminal to be the system console, remove the remote keyboard jumper.
Otherwise, leave the jumper intact.
12. Insert the Interface.
a. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer until you
find an empty even-numbered slot. (Slots are numbered from the
top down, so the top-most slot is number 1, the next slot down is
number 2, etc.) Do not remove the silver cover plates from the bottom
of a Series 300 computer.
Adding Interface Cards
5-47
HP 98626A RS-232C Interface
b. Insert the RS-232C Interface, component side up, into the empty
even-numbered slot. Tighten the thumb screws on the metal end plate
until the end plate is flush with the back of the computer.
c. If you changed the select code of the RS-232C Interface in step 2, find
this number in the set of select code labels supplied with the interface.
Affix this label to the metal end plate.
d. If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise, replace them.
13. Record the Select Code.
Make a note that select code 9 (or the alternate select code you chose in
step 2) has been used and is no longer available. Use the “Select Code
Record” form on the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab for this purpose.
Verification Test
1. Plug in the power cord and turn your computer on. If you have systems
on-line that the computer can boot, press the space bar a few times to
suspend the automatic booting process.
2. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the screen:
■ If the message, HP98626, appears in the list, you have correctly installed
the HP 98626A RS-232C Interface.
■ If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure,
making sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly
seated in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear, call
your HP Service Representative for assistance.
5-48
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98626A RS-232C Interface
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the HP 98626A RS-232C Interface.
The following table contains information needed to use the RS-232C Interface
with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this select code to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you
need it. If you changed the select code in step 2-b, write in your new select code
instead of 9.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-10.
Interface Name
HP 98626A
Select Code
9
Adding Interface Cards
5-49
HP 98627A Color Output Interface
Description and Support
The HP 98627A Color Output Interface allows you to connect an external color
monitor to your computer.
HP 98627A Color Output Interface
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
5-50
on Release
with Model
5.1 or later
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev. A or later
Adding Interface Cards
Installation Procedure
HP 98627A Color Output Interface
Figure 5-23.
HP 98627A Color Video Output Interface Switches
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
Adding Interface Cards
5-51
HP 98627A Color Output Interface
b. Remove the Color Output Interface from its envelope, being careful to
handle the card only by its edges and metal end plate. The card may be
easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
c. Place the card on the envelope. 2. Set the Select Code.
SKIP?
If this is the first (or only) HP 98627A Color Output Interface
you are installing, you can skip to step 3. The Color Output
Interface is preset to use select codes 28 and 29, and need not
be changed.
Possible Conflict: The Multiprogrammer Interface is preset
to select code 29 and will conflict with the default select code
setting of the Color Output Interface. If you have both of these
interfaces, change the select code of the Multiprogrammer
Interface.
a. Find the set of four select code switches by referring to Figure 5-23.
b. The select code switches must be set to an even select code and the next
odd select code must not be used by another interface. Find an even
select code that meets this stipulation.
c. Refer to the manual that came with the interface to set the select code
switches to the value you’ve chosen.
3. Set Option Switch 1.
SKIP?
If you intend to connect an HP 13279B Color Monitor to this
interface, you can skip to step 4. Option switch 1 is preset for a
combined green and sync signal and need not be changed.
a. Set option switch 1 as follows:
■ If connecting an HP 13279B Color Monitor to this interface, set option
switch 1 for combined green and sync signal as shown in Figure 5-23.
■ If connecting some other monitor, set option switch 1 opposite of that
shown in Figure 5-23 if the monitor provides for a separate sync signal;
5-52
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98627A Color Output Interface
otherwise set the interface to a combined green and sync signal by
setting option switch 1 as shown in Figure 5-23.
4. Set option switch 2.
SKIP?
If you intend to connect an HP 13279B Color Monitor to this
interface, you can skip to step 5. Option switch 2 is preset to a
24.8 kHz horizontal scan and need not be changed.
a. Set option switch 2 as follows:
■ If connecting an HP 13279B Color Monitor to this interface, set option
switch 2 to 24.8 kHz horizontal scan as shown in Figure 5-23.
■ If connecting some other monitor, set option switch 2 opposite of that
shown in Figure 5-23 if the monitor has a 15.75 kHz horizontal scan;
set option switch 2 as shown in Figure 5-23 if the monitor has a 24.8
kHz scan.
5. Insert the Interface.
a. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer until
you find an empty even-numbered slot. (Slots are numbered from the top
down, so the top-most slot is number 1, the next slot down is number 2,
etc.) Do not remove the silver cover plates from the bottom of a Series
300 computer.
b. Insert the Color Output Interface, component side up, into the empty
even-numbered slot. Tighten the thumb screws on the metal end plate
until the end plate is flush with the back of the computer.
c. If you changed the select code of the Color Output Interface in step
2, find this number in the set of select code labels supplied with the
interface. Affix this label to the metal end plate.
d. If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise, replace them.
6. Record the Select Code.
Make a note that select codes 28 and 29 (or the alternate select codes
you chose in step 2) have been used and are no longer available. Use the
Adding Interface Cards
5-53
HP 98627A Color Output Interface
“Select Code Record” form on the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab for this
purpose.
Verification Test
1. Plug in the power cord and turn your computer on. If you have systems online that the computer can boot, press the space bar a few times to suspend
the automatic booting process.
2. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the screen:
■ If the message, HP98627, appears in the list, you have correctly installed
the Color Output Interface.
■ If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure,
making sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly
seated in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear, call
your HP Service Representative for assistance.
5-54
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98627A Color Output Interface
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the HP 98627A Color Output Interface.
The following table contains information needed to use the Color Output
Interface with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this select code to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you
need it. If you changed the select code in step 2-b, write in your new select code
instead of 28.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-11.
Interface Name
HP 98627A
Select Code
28
HP-UX Notes
■ The character mode major number for the Color Output Interface is 12.
■ A typical mknod for a Color Output Interface at select code 28 (the default)
is:
# mknod /dev/graphics c 12 0x1c0200
The 1c represents select code 28 (1c is hexadecimal for 28).
Adding Interface Cards
5-55
HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
Description and Support
The HP 98628A Datacomm Interface connects to a serial peripheral, terminal,
modem or computer and supports the RS-232C datacomm standard. One
interface is required for each terminal, and each interface must be set to a unique
select code.
HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
5-56
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev. A or later
Adding Interface Cards
Installation Procedure
HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
Figure 5-24.
98628A Datacomm Interface Switches
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
b. Remove the Datacomm Interface from its envelope, being careful to
handle the card only by its edges and metal end plate. The card may be
easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
c. Place the card on the envelope.
2. Set the Select Code.
Adding Interface Cards
5-57
HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
SKIP?
If this is the first (or only) Datacomm Interface you are
installing, you can skip to step 3. The select code is preset to
20 and need not be changed.
a. Find the set of select code and interrupt level switches by referring to
Figure 5-24. Switches 0 thru 4 in this group determine the select code.
b. Set these switches to one of the five select codes given below, unless
you have used them elsewhere (check the Select Code Record on the
Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab to see which ones you have used).
Refer to the installation note that came with the interface if you need
additional switch settings.
Figure 5-25.
5-58
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
3. Set the Interrupt Level.
SKIP?
The interface is preset to interrupt level 3. Unless you
are certain that interrupt level 3 is inappropriate for your
application, leave the interrupt level setting alone and skip to
step 4.
a. Find the set of select code and interrupt level switches by referring to
Figure 5-24. Switches 5 and 6 in this group determine the interrupt level.
b. If you need to change the interrupt level, set the switches according to the
following table:
Table 5-12.
4.
Interrupt
Level
Switch
1
Switch
0
3
0
0
4
0
1
5
1
0
6
1
1
Set the Remote Switch.
SKIP?
If you are not connecting your system console to this interface,
you can skip to step 5. The Remote switch is preset to “OFF,”
which does not configure the interface to be the system console.
a. Find the set of select code and interrupt level switches by referring to
Figure 5-24. Switch 7 in this group is the Remote switch.
Adding Interface Cards
5-59
HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
b. Set the Remote switch as follows:
■ If you are connecting a terminal to this interface and want the
terminal to be the system console, set this switch to 0 (remote),
which is opposite that shown in Figure 5-24. Be aware that the boot
ROM will not recognize this terminal as the system console, even
though HP-UX will. No boot ROM messages will appear on the
associated terminal; therefore, do not use the HP 98628A as a system
console until after HP-UX is installed.
■ If you are connecting a terminal to this interface but do not want
the terminal to be the system console, set this switch to 1 (OFF) as
shown in Figure 5-24.
5. Set the Protocol Switch.
SKIPSTEP? If you will not be using this interface for networking with an
HP 1000 computer (via the HP DSN/Data Link protocol), then
you can skip to step 6. The protocol switch is preset for the
Async protocol and need not be changed for most applications.
a. Find the Default switch group by referring to Figure 5-24. Switch 0 in this
group is the protocol switch.
b. Set the protocol switch as follows:
■ If you want the Async protocol, used with most connections, set switch
0 to 0 as shown in Figure 5-24.
■ If you want the HP DSN/Data Link protocol, used in networking with
an HP 1000 host computer, set switch 0 to 1, which is opposite that
shown in Figure 5-24.
5-60
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
6. Set the Baud Rate.
a. Find the Default switch group by referring to Figure 5-24. Switches 1 thru
3 in this group determine the baud rate.
b. Set the baud rate switches as follows:
■ If connecting an HP 2601A printer or an HP 92205A/C Hayes
Smartmodem 1200 to this interface, set the baud rate switches to
1200. To get 1200 baud, set switch 3 to 1, and set switches 2 and 1 to
0. The switches will look like this:
Figure 5-26.
■ If connecting a terminal or an HP 2686 LaserJet printer to this
interface, set the baud rate switches to 9600. To get 9600 baud, set
switches 3, 2 and 1 to 1 as shown in Figure 5-24.
■ If connecting an HP 39800/01A Bar Code Reader to this interface, set
the baud rate switches to 2400. To get 2400 baud, set switches 3 and
1 to 1, and set switch 2 to 0. The switches will look like this:
Figure 5-27.
■ If connecting any other device to this interface, set the baud rate
switches to match the baud rate of the device. See the installation
manual that came with the interface for all baud rate settings.
Adding Interface Cards
5-61
HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
7. Set the Hardware Handshake.
a. Find the Default switch group by referring to Figure 5-24. Switches 4 and
5 in this group determine the hardware handshake.
b. Set the hardware handshake switches as follows:
■ If connecting an HP 92205A/C Hayes SmartModem 1200, an HP
2334A X.25 Cluster Controller, or uucp, set switch 5 to 0 and set
switch 4 to 1. This sets up a full duplex modem connection. The
switches will look like this:
Figure 5-28.
■ If connecting an HP 2686 LaserJet printer, set both switches 5 and 4
to 1 as shown in Figure 5-24. This sets up a non-modem connection
with the handshake on.
■ If connecting a terminal or HP 39800/01A bar code reader, set both
switches 4 and 5 to 0, which is opposite that shown in Figure 5-24.
This sets up a non-modem connection with the handshake off.
8. Set the Parity Type/Character Length.
a. Find the Default switch group by referring to Figure 5-24. Switches 6
and 7 in this group determine the parity type/character length.
b. Set the parity type/character length switches as follows:
■ If connecting an HP 92205A/C Hayes SmartModem 1200, set the
parity type/character length switches to match the device you are
communicating with. Refer to the manual that came with the
interface for a list of settings.
■ If connecting a terminal, an HP 2686 LaserJet printer, an HP 2601A
printer, or an HP 39800/01A bar code reader, set both switches 6 and
5-62
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
7 to 0 as shown in Figure 5-24. This sets up 8 bits/character and no
parity.
9. Insert the Interface.
a. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer until
you find an empty even-numbered slot. (Slots are numbered from the top
down, so the top-most slot is number 1, the next slot down is number 2,
etc.) Do not remove the silver cover plates from the bottom of a Series
300 computer.
b. Insert the Datacomm Interface, component side up, into the empty
even-numbered slot. Tighten the thumb screws on the metal end plate
until the end plate is flush with the back of the computer.
c. If you changed the select code of the Datacomm Interface in step 2, find
this number in the set of select code labels supplied with the interface.
Affix this label to the metal end plate.
d. If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise, replace them.
10. Record the Select Code.
11. Make a note that select code 20 (or the alternate select code you chose
in step 2) has been used and is no longer available. Use the “Select Code
Record” form on the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab for this purpose.
Verification Test
1. Plug in the power cord and turn your computer on. If you have systems
on-line that the computer can boot, press the space bar a few times to
suspend the automatic booting process.
2. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the screen:
■ If the message, HP98628, appears in the list, you have correctly installed
the Datacomm Interface.
■ If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure,
making sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly
seated in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear, call
your HP Service Representative for assistance.
Adding Interface Cards
5-63
HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the HP 98628A Datacomm Interface.
The following table contains information needed to use the Datacomm Interface
with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this select code to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you
need it. If you changed the select code in step 2-b, write in your new select code
instead of 20.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-13.
Interface Name
HP 93628A
5-64
Adding Interface Cards
Select Code
20
HP 98629A SRM Interface
HP 50961A SRM Interface
Description and Support
The HP 98629A Shared Resource Management (SRM) Interface and the HP
50961A SRM Coax Interface provide both protocol management and electrical
levels for communication between the computer and the Shared Resource
Management (SRM) system. The SRM system allows the computer to share
common disks, printers and plotters.
HP 98629A SRM Interface
HP 50961A SRM Coax Interface
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300 with Boot
ROM Rev. A or later
Adding Interface Cards
5-65
HP 98629A SRM Interface
HP 50961A SRM Interfaces
Installation Procedure
See manuals for your SRM system for information about installation. You
should perform the verification test, fill out your worksheet, and record the
SRM Interface select code (21) in the “Select Code Record” form on the
Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab.
Both the SRM and LAN interfaces are preset to select code 21. If you have
both SRM and LAN interfaces, change the setting of the SRM Interface to an
unused value (for example, set it to 22).
Verification Test
1. Plug in the power cord and turn your computer on. If you have systems online that the computer can boot, press the space bar a few times to suspend
the automatic booting process.
2. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the screen:
■ If the message, HP98629, appears in the list, you have correctly installed
the SRM Interface.
■ If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure,
making sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly
seated in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear, call
your HP Service Representative for assistance.
5-66
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98629A SRM Interface
HP 50961A SRM Interfaces
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the SRM Interface.
The following table contains information needed to use the SRM Interface with
the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this select code to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you need
it. If you changed the select code, write in your new select code instead of 21.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-14.
Interface Name
HP 98629A
Select Code
21
HP-UX Notes
■ The SRM Interface ships with select code 21, the same as the HP 98643A LAN
Interface. If you have both interfaces, change the SRM interface to a different
value. See the manual that came with the SRM Interface for a list of settings.
■ A typical mknod for an SRM Interface set to select code 21 and node address
0 is:
# mknod /dev/srm 13 c 0x150000
Adding Interface Cards
5-67
HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
Description and Support
The HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface has three direct-connect ports
and one port with full modem control. The buffering of this interface makes it
suitable for nearly all applications, including graphics terminals.
HP 93642A 4-channel Multiplexer Interface
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
5-68
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Interface Cards
Installation Procedure
HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
Figure 5-29.
HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface switches
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
Adding Interface Cards
5-69
HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
b. Remove the 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface from its envelope, being
careful to handle the card only by its edges and metal end plate. The
card may be easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
c. Place the card on the envelope.
2. Set the Select Code.
SKIP?
If this is the first (or only) 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface you
are installing, you can skip to step 3. The select code is preset
to 13 and need not be changed.
a. Find the group of eight switches on the interface by referring to
Figure 5-29. Switches 4 thru 8 in this group determine the select code.
b. Set these switches to one of the five select codes given in Figure 5-30,
unless you have used them elsewhere (check the Select Code Record on
the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab to see which ones you have used).
Refer to the installation note that came with the interface if you need
additional switch settings.
5-70
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
Figure 5-30.
3. Set the Interrupt Level.
SKIP?
The interface is preset to interrupt level 3. Unless you
are certain that interrupt level 3 is inappropriate for your
application, leave the interrupt level setting alone and skip to
step 4.
a. Find the group of eight switches on the interface by referring to
Figure 5-29. Switches 2 and 3 in this group determine the interrupt level.
b. Set the interrupt level to the desired value by referring to Table 5-15:
Adding Interface Cards
5-71
HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
Table 5-15.
Interrupt
Level
Switch
2
Switch
3
3
0
0
4
0
1
5
1
0
6
1
1
4. Set the Remote Switch.
SKIP?
If you are not connecting your system console to port 1 of
this interface, skip to step 5. The Remote switch is preset to
“local,” which does not configure port 1 to be the system
console.
a. Find the group of eight switches on the interface by referring to
Figure 5-29. Switch 1 in this group is the Remote switch.
b. Set the Remote switch as follows:
■ If you are connecting a terminal to port 1 of this interface and want
the terminal on port 1 to be the system console, set this switch to 1
(remote), which is opposite that shown in Figure 5-29. Be aware that
the boot ROM will not recognize this terminal as the system console,
even though HP-UX will. No boot ROM messages will appear on the
associated terminal; therefore, do not use the HP 98642A as a system
console until after HP-UX is installed.
■ If you are connecting a terminal to port 1 of this interface but do not
want the terminal on port 1 to be the system console, set this switch to
0 (local) as shown in Figure 5-29.
5. Insert the Interface.
a. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer until
you find an empty even-numbered slot. (Slots are numbered from the top
down, so the top-most slot is number 1, the next slot down is number 2,
5-72
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
etc.) Do not remove the silver cover plates from the bottom of a Series
300 computer.
b. Insert the 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface, component side up, into the
empty even-numbered slot. Tighten the thumb screws on the metal end
plate until the end plate is flush with the back of the computer.
c. If you changed the select code of the 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface in
step 2, find this number in the set of select code labels supplied with the
interface. Affix this label to the metal end plate.
d. If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise, replace them.
6. Record the Select Code.
Make a note that select code 13 (or the alternate select code you chose in
step 2) has been used and is no longer available. Use the “Select Code
Record” form on the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab for this purpose.
Verification Test
1. Plug in the power cord and turn your computer on. If you have systems online that the computer can boot, press the space bar a few times to suspend
the automatic booting process.
2. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the screen:
■ If the message, HP98642, appears in the list, you have correctly installed
the HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface.
■ If the message does not appear, repeat the installation procedure, making
sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly seated in
an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear, call your HP
Service Representative for assistance.
Adding Interface Cards
5-73
HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface.
The following table contains information needed to use the 4-Channel
Multiplexer Interface with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this select code to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you
need it. If you changed the select code in step 2-b, write in your new select code
instead of 13.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-16.
Interface Name
HP 98642A
5-74
Adding Interface Cards
Select Code
13
HP 98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface
Description and Support
The HP 98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface is used to connect a
computer to a local area network.
HP 98643A LAN Interface
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Interface Cards
5-75
HP 98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface
Installation Procedure
LAN installation is not documented here. Refer to the manuals that came with
your LAN system. However, do perform the verification test and fill out your
worksheet after installing the interface. Also record the LAN Interface select code
on the “Select Code Record” form on the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab.
Note
Both the LAN and SRM interfaces are preset to select code 21.
If you have both LAN and SRM interfaces, change the select code
of the LAN Interface to an unused value.
Verification Test
1. Plug in the power cord and turn your computer on. If you have systems online that the computer can boot, press the space bar a few times to suspend
the automatic booting process.
2. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the screen:
■ If the message, HP98643, appears in the list, you have correctly installed
the HP 98643A LAN Interface.
■ If the message does not appear, repeat the installation procedure, making
sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly seated in
an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear, call your HP
Service Representative for assistance.
5-76
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the HP 98643A LAN Interface.
The following table contains information needed to use the LAN Interface with
the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this select code to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you need
it. If you changed the select code, write in your new select code instead of 21.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-17.
Interface Name
HP 98643A
Select Code
21
HP-UX Notes
■ The character-mode major number for an IEEE-802 network is 18. The
character-mode major number for an EthernetTM is 19. (EthernetTM is a
trademark of the Xerox Corporation.)
■ A typical mknod for a LAN Interface at select code 21 on an IEEE-802 (major
number 18) Local Area Network is:
# mknod /dev/lan 18 c 0x150000
The 15 in the minor number represents the select code (15 is the hexadecimal
value for 21).
Adding Interface Cards
5-77
HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface
Description and Support
The HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface connects to a terminal, modem,
serial peripheral, or computer and supports the RS-232C standard. One
interface is required for each device, and each interface must be set to a unique
select code.
HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
5-78
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300 with Boot
ROM Rev. A or later
Adding Interface Cards
Installation Procedure
HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface
Figure 5-31.
HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface switches
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
b. Remove the Asynchronous Serial Interface from its envelope, being
careful to handle the card only by its edges and metal end plate. The
card may be easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
c. Place the card on the envelope.
2. Set the Select Code.
SKIP?
If you have a Series 200 Model 220, 226, 236 or 237 computer,
and you have not already installed an HP 98626A or HP
Adding Interface Cards
5-79
HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface
98644A interface, then you can skip to step 3. The select code
is preset to 9 and need not be changed.
a. Find the group of switches labeled SW1 by referring to Figure 5-31.
Switches 6 thru 10 in this group determine the select code.
b. Set these switches to one of the five select codes given in Figure 5-32,
unless you have used them elsewhere (check the Select Code Record on
the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab to see which ones you have used).
Refer to the installation note that came with the interface if you need
additional switch settings.
Figure 5-32.
3. Set the Interrupt Level.
5-80
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface
SKIP?
The interface is preset to interrupt level 3. Unless you
are certain that interrupt level 3 is inappropriate for your
application, leave the interrupt level setting alone and skip to
step 4.
a. Find the group of switches labeled SW1 by referring to Figure 5-31.
Switches 4 and 5 in this group determine the interrupt level.
b. Set the interrupt level to the desired value by referring to the following
table:
Table 5-18.
Interrupt
Level
Switch
5
Switch
4
3
0
0
4
0
1
5
1
0
6
1
1
4. Set the MODEM ENable Switch.
a. Find the group of switches labeled SW1 by referring to Figure 5-31.
Switch 3 in this group is the MODEM ENable switch.
b. Set the MODEM ENable switch as follows:
■ If you intend to connect an HP 2686A LaserJet printer, an HP
92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem, or a uucp, set this switch to 1 as
shown in Figure 5-31.
■ If you intend to connect a terminal or the HP 39800/01A bar
code reader, set this switch to 0, which is opposite that shown in
Figure 5-31.
5. Set the 626 Switch.
a. Find the group of switches labeled SW1 by referring to Figure 5-31.
Switch 2 in this group is the 626 switch.
Adding Interface Cards
5-81
HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface
b. Set the 626 switch to 1 as shown in Figure 5-31.
6. Set the REMOTE Switch.
a. Find the group of switches labeled SW1 by referring to Figure 5-31.
Switch 1 in this group is the Remote switch.
b. Set the Remote switch as follows:
■ If you are connecting a terminal to this interface and want this
terminal to be the system console, set this switch to 1, which is
opposite that shown in Figure 5-31.
■ If you are connecting a terminal to this interface but do not want this
terminal to be the system console, or if you are connecting any other
device, set this switch to 0 as shown in Figure 5-31.
7. Insert the Interface.
a. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer until
you find an empty even-numbered slot. (Slots are numbered from the top
down, so the top-most slot is number 1, the next slot down is number 2,
etc.) Do not remove the silver cover plates from the bottom of a Series
300 computer.
b. Insert the Asynchronous Serial Interface, component side up, into the
empty even-numbered slot. Tighten the thumb screws on the metal end
plate until the end plate is flush with the back of the computer.
c. If you changed the select code of the Asynchronous Serial Interface in
step 2, find this number in the set of select code labels supplied with the
interface. Affix this label to the metal end plate.
d. If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise, replace them.
8. Record the Select Code.
Make a note that select code 9 (or the alternate select code you chose in
step 2) has been used and is no longer available. Use the “Select Code
Record” form on the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab for this purpose.
5-82
Adding Interface Cards
Verification Test
HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface
1. Plug in the power cord and turn your computer on. If you have systems
on-line that the computer can boot, press the space bar a few times to
suspend the automatic booting process.
2. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the screen:
■ If you have boot ROM 4.0 or later, the message, HP98644, should
appear in the list. If it does, you have correctly installed the HP 98644A
Asynchronous Serial Interface. If no message appears, repeat the
installation procedure, making sure there are no select code conflicts and
that the card is firmly seated in an even-numbered slot. If the message
still does not appear, call your HP Service Representative for assistance.
■ If you have boot ROM 3.0, no message will appear, as boot ROM 3.0
does not identify the HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface. Assume
installation is correct.
Adding Interface Cards
5-83
HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface.
The following table contains information needed to use the Asynchronous Serial
Interface with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this select code to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you
need it. If you changed the select code in step 2-b, write in your new select code
instead of 9.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-19.
Interface Name
HP 98644A
5-84
Adding Interface Cards
Select Code
9
HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
Description and Support
The HP 98562-66530 Human Interface board (also called the System
Interface board) includes an RS-232C Serial interface, an HP-HIL interface, a
standard-speed HP-IB interface, a DMA controller, and a Local Area Network
(LAN) interface. You can also get an Optional interface (such as an optional
Disk interface or SCSI) in addition to those mentioned above.
HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.2 or later
330
350
Adding Interface Cards
5-85
HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
Installation Procedure
Figure 5-33.
Human (System) Interface board switches
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
b. Remove the Human (System) Interface board from the back of your
computer by loosening the two thumb screws and pulling on the handle.
Be careful to handle the card only by its edges and metal end plate, as
the card may be easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
5-86
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
c. Place the card on a static-free surface.
d. Do not disconnect the option card or its cable.
2. Set the HP-IB System Controller Switch.
SKIP?
Unless you intend to connect two computers together with this
interface, you can skip to step 3. The interface is configured to
be system controller and need not be changed.
a. Find the group of four switches labeled “HPIB/RS232”. The switch
labeled “SC” in this group is the System Controller switch (see
Figure 5-33).
b. If connecting two computers together via HP-IB, only one of them may
be set to system controller. To change this interface to non-system
controller, move the System Controller switch to the 0 position (the
opposite of that shown in Figure 5-33).
Note: If you will be connecting a disk drive, printer, plotter or other
peripheral to this interface, and you will be using an HP Series 200/300
operating system, do not set this switch to non-system controller.
3. Set the RS-232C Disable Switch.
SKIP?
The interface is shipped from the factory with the RS-232C
Serial interface enabled (meaning you can use the interface).
If you intend to use this RS-232C interface, skip to step 4. If
you do not intend to use this RS-232C interface, and are using
another interface at select code 9, continue with this step. Once
disabled, this interface will not be recognized by the boot ROM
and will not occupy select code 9.
a. Find the group of four switches labeled “HPIB/RS232”. The switch
labeled “DIS” in this group is the RS-232C Disable switch (see
Figure 5-33).
b. To disable the RS-232C Serial interface, move the DIS switch to the 1
position (the opposite of that shown in Figure 5-33).
Adding Interface Cards
5-87
HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
If you later want to enable the RS-232C Serial interface, move the switch
back to the 0 position as shown in Figure 5-33.
4. Set the RS-232C Remote Terminal Enable Switch.
SKIP?
The interface is shipped from the factory with the remote
terminal enable switch set to local mode. If you intend to
connect a terminal to the RS-232C interface, and want this
terminal to be the system console, continue with this step.
Otherwise, skip to step 5.
a. Find the group of four switches labeled “HPIB/RS232”. The switch
labeled “REM” in this group is the Remote Terminal Enable switch (see
Figure 5-33).
b. Set the “REM” switch as follows:
■ If you are connecting a terminal to this interface and want this
terminal to be the system console, set this switch to 1, which is the
opposite of that shown in Figure 5-33.
■ If you are connecting a terminal to this interface but do not want this
terminal to be the system console, or if you are connecting any other
device, set this switch to 0 as shown in Figure 5-33.
5. Set the Modem Lines Enable Switch.
a. Find the group of four switches labeled “HPIB/RS232”. The switch
labeled “MEN” in this group is the Modem Lines Enable switch (see
Figure 5-33).
b. Set the “MEN” switch as follows:
■ If you intend to connect an HP 2601A printer, an HP 2686A LaserJet
printer, an HP 92205A/C Hayes SmartModem, or a uucp, set this
switch to 1 as shown in Figure 5-33.
■ If you intend to connect a terminal or the HP 39800/01A bar code
reader, set this switch to 0, which is the opposite of that shown in
Figure 5-33.
6. Set the LAN Select Code.
5-88
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
SKIP?
If you also have an SRM interface installed in your computer
(at select code 21), you must change the select code of the
LAN interface to an unused value; continue with this step.
Otherwise, skip to step 7. The select code is preset to 21 and
need not be changed.
a. Find the group of eight switches labeled “LAN”. The five switches
labeled “M” (for Most-significant bit) and “SELECT CODE” in this
group are the LAN Select Code switches (see Figure 5-33).
b. Set the LAN Select Code switches to one of the four select codes given
in Figure 5-34, unless you have used them elsewhere.
Figure 5-34.
7. Set the LAN Interrupt Level.
SKIP?
The LAN interface is preset to interrupt level 5, the setting
required by HP-UX. Unless you are certain that interrupt level
5 is inappropriate for your application, leave the interrupt level
setting alone and skip to step 8.
a. Find the group of eight switches labeled “LAN”. The two switches
labeled “INT” and “LEV” in this group are the LAN Interrupt Level
switches (see Figure 5-33).
b. Set the LAN Interrupt Level switches according to Table 5-20:
Adding Interface Cards
5-89
HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
Table 5-20.
Interrupt
Level
LEV
INT
3
0
0
4
0
1
5
1
0
6
1
1
8. Set the Local/Remote Switch.
SKIP IT!
The interface is shipped from the factory with the remote/local
switch set to local mode (0). We recommend that you leave
this setting alone.
9. Set the Optional Interface Select Code.
Note
Both the Optional interface and the HP 98625A/B interfaces
are preset to select code 14. If you have both the Optional and
HP 98625A/B interfaces, change the select code of one of them
to an unused value.
a. Find the group of nine switches labeled “OPTION CARD”. The five
switches labeled “M” (for Most-significant bit) and “SELECT CODE” in
this group are the Select Code switches (see Figure 5-33).
b. Set the Select Code switches to one of the four select codes given in
Figure 5-35, unless you have used them elsewhere.
5-90
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
Figure 5-35.
10. Set the Optional Interface Interrupt Level.
SKIP?
If you are using HP-UX, you can skip to step 11. The interrupt
level is preset to 4 and need not be changed. Do not set any
other interface (except for the HP 98629A SRM interface) to
interrupt level 4.
If you will not be using HP-UX and want to change the
interrupt level, continue with this step.
a. Find the group of nine switches labeled “OPTION CARD”. The two
switches labeled “INT” and “LEV” in this group are the Interrupt Level
switches.
b. Set the Interrupt Level switches according to Table 5-21:
Table 5-21.
Interrupt
Level
LEV
INT
3
0
0
4
0
1
5
1
0
6
1
1
11. Set the Optional Interface System Controller Switch.
Adding Interface Cards
5-91
HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
SKIP?
Unless you intend to connect two computers together with this
interface, you can skip to step 12. The interface is configured to be
system controller and need not be changed.
a. Find the group of nine switches labeled “OPTION CARD”. The
switch labeled “SC” in this group is the System Controller switch (see
Figure 5-33).
b. If connecting two computers, only one of them may be set to system
controller. To change this interface to non-system controller, change the
System Controller switch to 0 (the opposite of that shown in
Figure 5-33).
Note: If you will be connecting a disk drive or other peripheral to this
interface, and you will be using an HP Series 200/300 operating system,
do not set this switch to non-system controller.
12. Set the Optional Interface Low/High Speed Switch.
SKIP?
The Low/High Speed switch is preset to 0, “high speed,” as
shown in Figure 5-33. This setting is appropriate for most
applications. If you want to change this setting, continue with
step 12; otherwise skip to step 13.
a. Find the set of nine switches labeled “OPTION CARD”. The switch
labeled “LOW” in this group is the Low/High Speed switch (see
Figure 5-33).
b. Set this switch as follows:
■ To set this switch to low speed, set the “LOW” switch to 1, which is
opposite of that shown in Figure 5-33.
■ To set this switch to high speed, set the “LOW” switch to 0 as shown
in Figure 5-33.
13. Insert the Interface.
Re-insert the Human (System) Interface board into the slot you removed it
from and tighten the thumb screws to secure it.
5-92
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
14. Record the Select Codes.
a. Make a note that the following select codes have been used and are no
longer available:
■ 7 - the built-in, standard-speed HP-IB interface.
■ 9 - the built-in RS-232C Serial interface (unless you disabled the
interface in step 3).
■ 14 - the Optional interface (unless you changed the select code in step 9
or did not purchase this option).
■ 21 - the built-in LAN interface (unless you changed the select code in
step 6).
Use the “Select Code Record” form on the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards”
tab for this purpose.
Verification Test
1. Plug in the power cord. Turn your computer on and hold down the space bar
a few seconds.
2. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the screen:
■ If the message, HPIB, appears in the list, you have correctly installed the
built-in, standard-speed HP-IB interface.
■ If the message, HP98644 at 9, appears in the list, you have correctly
installed the built-in RS-232C Serial interface, and the interface is enabled.
■ If the message, HP98643 at 21, appears in the list, you have correctly
installed the built-in LAN interface. (Note: 21 will be replaced by another
number if you changed the select code.)
■ If the message, HP98625 at 14, appears in the list, you have correctly
installed the Optional interface. (Note: 14 will be replaced by another
number if you changed the select code.)
If any of these messages does not appear, make sure there are no select code
conflicts and that the board is firmly seated in the slot. If you still have
problems, call your HP Service Representative for assistance.
Adding Interface Cards
5-93
HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the Human (System) Interface board.
The following table contains information needed to use the interfaces with the
HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you need
it. If you changed the select code of any of the interfaces, write in your new
select code instead of the one listed.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-22.
Interface Name
Select Code
Built-in HP-IB
7
Built-in RS-232C (HP 98644)
9
Built-in Disk (HP 98625B)
14
*
Built-in LAN (HP 98643)
5-94
**
21
*
Do not make this entry if you disabled
the RS-232C interface in step 3.
**
Do not make this entry if you did not
purchase the optional Disk interface.
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Video Boards
Description and Support
The HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Video boards output video from the
host computer to the following set of HP High Resolution Monitors:
■ HP 98548A board for High Resolution (1024x768 pixel) Monochrome
Monitors.
■ HP 98549A board for High Resolution (1024x768 pixel) Color Monitors.
■ HP 98550A board for High Resolution (1280x1024 pixel) Color Monitors.
HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Video Boards
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
*
on Release
with Model
5.5 or later
330
340*
350
360
370
Built-in on Model 340MH
NOTE: Minimum boot ROM is REV.C.
Adding Interface Cards
5-95
HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Video Boards
Installation Procedure
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer OFF and unplug the power cord.
b. Remove the High Resolution Video Board from its envelope, being careful
to handle the card only by its edges. The card may be easily damaged by
electrostatic discharge (static zap).
c. Place the card on the envelope.
2. If you are upgrading a computer which has video furnished by a combination
processor/video board, continue with this step. Otherwise, skip to step 3.
a. Turn the monitor power OFF and disconnect the existing monitor and
video cable.
b. Remove the top wide slot cover plate from the back of the computer (see
Figure 5-36).
Figure 5-36.
Processor Board Placement
5-96
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Video Boards
c. Loosen the two captive screws securing the processor board. You may
need a Pozidriv screwdriver to loosen them.
d. Slide the processor board out of the backplane and place it on a staticfree surface. The bag which the new video board is packaged in is a good
place.
e. Locate the Display Disable switch (see Figure 5-37).
Figure 5-37.
Display Disable Switch
f.
Set the switch to the Display Disable position.
g. If there is a grounding clip on the top edge of the processor board back
plate, remove it.
h. Re-install the processor board in the upper wide backplane slot and
tighten the captive fasteners.
i.
Now continue with step 4 in this Installation Procedure.
3. Follow these steps to install a video board in a computer which either has an
existing video board or does not have video:
Adding Interface Cards
5-97
HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Video Boards
a. Turn the monitor OFF and disconnect the existing monitor and video
cables (if any).
b. Remove the existing video board or empty slot cover plate from the
bottom wide slot on the back of the computer (see Figure 5-38). You
may need a Pozidriv screwdriver to loosen it.
Figure 5-38.
Video Board Placement
4. Complete the Installation Procedure.
a. Set the video board’s eight configuration switches as shown in
Figure 5-39.
5-98
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Video Boards
Figure 5-39.
Video Board Configuration Switches
b. Press the video board into the connector and tighten the captive
fasteners. You may need a Pozidriv screwdriver.
c. Connect the included video cable or cable set to the new video board and
to the new monitor.
d. Connect the power cord to the monitor and turn the power ON.
e. Re-connect the power cord to the computer and turn the power ON.
Adding Interface Cards
5-99
HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Video Boards
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Video Board.
There is no “Worksheet Entry” needed to use High Resolution Video Board with
the HP-UX operating system.
You are ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
5-100
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98724A/98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface
Description and Support
The HP 98724A/25A Local Graphics Bus (LGB) interface card provides a
connection between the HP 98720 Graphics Display Station and the computer.
HP 98724A/25A Local Graphics Bus
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
with Product
on Release
with Model
HP 98724A
5.18 or later
320
HP 98725A
5.2 or later
330
350
Adding Interface Cards
5-101
HP 98724A/98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface
Installation Procedure
Figure 5-40.
HP 98724A LGB Interface Switches
5-102
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98724A/98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface
Figure 5-41.
HP 98725A LGB Interface Switches
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
b. Remove the HP 98724A/25A from its envelope, being careful to handle
the card by its edges and metal end plate. The card may be easily
damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
c. Place the card on the envelope.
2. Set the Frame Buffer Address and Select Code.
SKIP?
If this is the first (or only) LGB card you are installing and you
want to use the Graphics Display Station as the system console,
you can skip to step 3. Your LGB interface card has been
preset to an internal addressing mode (as shown in Figure 5-40
and Figure 5-41).
Adding Interface Cards
5-103
HP 98724A/98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface
If you have two Graphics Display Stations, only one of them
may be set to internal addressing mode, so you should follow
the directions in step 2 when installing the second LGB card.
a. Find the set of six switches labeled “SW1” on the HP 98724A/25A
interface card (see Figure 5-40 and Figure 5-41). The switch labeled
“FB” determines the Frame Buffer address, and the other five switches
labeled “CS” (for Control Space) determine the interface’s select code.
b. To use the Graphics Display Station as a graphics output device only,
you need to set the switches to an external addressing mode. Set these
switches to one of the three select codes given in Figure 5-42, unless you
have used them elsewhere. Refer to the installation note that came with
the interface if you need additional switch settings.
Figure 5-42.
3. Insert the LGB Interface Card.
a. Insert the HP 98724A/25A, component side up, into an empty I/O slot
in your computer. Tighten the thumb screws on the metal end plate until
the end plate is flush with the back of the computer.
b. If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise replace them.
4. Record the Select Code.
If you set the select code in step 2, record it on the “Select Code Record”
form on the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab so that you will know in
the future that it has been used and is no longer available. If you did not
change the switches from their original settings, you need not worry about a
select code, since the internal code for the system console is used.
5-104
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98724A/98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface
Note
Installation of the HP 98720 Graphics Display Station is
covered in Chapter 8, “Graphics Devices”.
Adding Interface Cards
5-105
HP 98724A/98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface
Worksheet Entry
You have now installed the HP 98724A/25A local Graphics Bus Interface.
The following table is here to record any select code choice you might have made
in step 2b of the installation procedure.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you need
it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-23.
Interface Name
HP 98724A/25A
*
5-106
Select Code*
-
If you changed the select code
from the default setting, write it
in here.
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
Description and Support
The HP 98265A SCSI Card allows you to transfer data to and from disk drives at
high-speed transfer rates.
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
6.0 or later
330
350
Adding Interface Cards
5-107
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
Installation Procedure
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
b. Remove the SCSI Interface from its envelope, being careful to handle
the card only by its edges and metal end plate. The card may be easily
damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
c. Place the card on the envelope.
2. Locate the System Interface Board.
Figure 5-43.
System Interface Board
5-108
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
3. Loosen the screws on the System Interface Board and slide it out far enough
to expose the large connector.
Figure 5-44.
Slide out System Interface Board
Adding Interface Cards
5-109
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
4. Slide the left-hand flange out and rotate it down.
Figure 5-45.
Left-hand Flange
5. Remove existing interface card.
SKIP?
If there is no interface card currently mounted on the System
Interface Board, skip to step 6.
a. Remove the existing cable by pulling it away from the interface card.
5-110
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
b. Remove the four Pozidriv screws securing the interface card to the
System Interface Board.
Figure 5-46.
Pozidriv Screws
c. Gently pull the interface card straight up and remove it from the System
Interface Board.
Figure 5-47.
Removing the Existing Interface Card
Adding Interface Cards
5-111
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
d. Wrap the interface card in static-free material and set it and the cable
aside.
5-112
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
6. Hold the SCSI card with the component side down and with the cable
connector to the left.
Figure 5-48.
Position the SCSI Card
7. Press the connector on the SCSI card into the connector on the System
Interface Board.
Figure 5-49.
Joining the Connectors
Adding Interface Cards
5-113
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
8. Fasten the card to the board with the four screws provided.
Figure 5-50.
Locating the Four Screws
9. Attach the cable.
a. Locate the interface end of the cable.
Figure 5-51.
Interface End of Cable
5-114
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
b. Slide the connector onto the socket on the interface card.
Figure 5-52.
Connecting Cable to Interface Card
c. Press the cable into the cable clamp.
Figure 5-53.
Cable Clamp
Adding Interface Cards
5-115
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
d. Rotate the left-hand flange up and slide it into place.
Figure 5-54.
Sliding Left-hand Flange Into Place
10. Slide the System Interface Board into the computer and tighten the two
screws.
Figure 5-55.
Fasten Two Screws
5-116
Adding Interface Cards
Worksheet Entry
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
You have now installed the SCSI interface.
The following table contains information needed to use the SCSI interface with
the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this select code to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you need
it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Table 5-24.
Interface Name
HP 98265A
Select Code
14
HP-UX Notes
To connect a SCSI-compatible disk drive to the SCSI interface:
1. Turn your computer and disk drive off, if they are not already off.
2. Make sure the disk drive is a single-ended SCSI disk drive.
3. Attach the cable coming from the SCSI interface to one of the two
connectors on the disk drive (it doesn’t matter which one). Press fully in.
4. Place the terminator (supplied with the SCSI interface card) fully on the
other connector on the disk drive.
5. Select a bus address not currently used by any other device on the bus.
6. Turn on the power to the disk drive BEFORE turning the power on to the
computer.
Once you have set up your SCSI disk drive(s) and properly connected the
drives to the computer, you are ready to access the driver using HP-UX.
Remember that the terminator must be attached to the second connector on
the disk drive (step 4 above).
Adding Interface Cards
5-117
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
■ The select code for the SCSI interface card is set by the select code switches
found on the System Interface Board. The default setting (set at the factory)
is 14.
Note
Both the SCSI and the HP 98625A/B interfaces are preset
to select code 14. If you have both SCSI and HP 98625A/B
interfaces, change the select code of the HP 98625A/B Interface
to an unused value.
■ The block-mode major number for SCSI interface is 7.
■ The character-mode major number for the SCSI interface is 47.
■ The minor number for a SCSI interface at select code 14 is 0x0e0n00, where
n is the number that identifies the address of the disk drive.
For instance, suppose you are using an HP 7959S disk drive:
Table 5-25.
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number*
Interleave
Factor
HP 7959S
dev/dsk/0s0
b
7
0x0e0n00
1
HP 7959S
dev/rdsk/0s0
c
47
0x0e0n00
1
Device Name
*
5-118
n is a number that identifies the address. Replace n with a 0 if the address
was set to 0, use 2 if the address was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98726A Interface Card
Description and Support
The HP 98726A interface card provides a connection between a Series 300
SPU-backplane DIO-I or DIO-II bus and the 32-bit multiplexed address/data
Local Graphics Bus (LGB). The interface acts as a slave on the DIO bus and
as a master controller on the LGB.
The interface supports byte and word transfers in accordance with DIO-I
specifications as well as longword and unaligned transfers specified in DIO-II.
HP 98726A Interface Card
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
6.2 or later
330
350
Adding Interface Cards
5-119
HP 98726A Interface Card
Installation Procedure
1. Play It Safe.
a. Turn your computer off and unplug the power cord.
b. Remove the HP 98726A from its envelope, being careful to handle the
card by its edges and metal end plate. The card may be easily damaged
by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
c. Place the card on the envelope.
2. Check the Address Switches and Jumper Position.
a. The default settings for the address switches are shown in Figure 5-56.
Figure 5-56.
HP 98726A Interface Switches
These address switches perform three functions:
■ Switch 1 determines whether the interface will respond to a DIO-I or
DIO-II select code.
■ Switch 2 determines whether the interface will work in DIO-I Internal or
External memory space.
■ The remaining six switches set the interface’s select code.
5-120
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98726A Interface Card
b. The jumper JP1 determines the memory location for the card’s control
space in DIO-I. The default position of JP1 is shown in Figure 5-57.
Figure 5-57.
HP 98726A Jumper #1 Default Position
The card’s control space can be at $200000 (default and recommended) or
at $800000.
Caution
You must know exactly what you are doing when you use
jumper JP1 in the $800000 position. Be absolutely sure that no
other use of that area of memory is being made. Unpredictable
results will occur if other software/hardware attempt to use
memory location $800000.
Adding Interface Cards
5-121
HP 98726A Interface Card
3. Configure Your System.
The graphics subsystem attached to this interface card can either be the
system console or a peripheral device. The following summary presents your
configuration options. The HP-UX operating system identifies the system
console using the following choices:
■ CONSOLE CONFIGURATION
a. A Console Terminal is an RS-232 terminal that has the remote bit
set on its interface card by either a switch being set or a resistor
being removed. Any Console Terminal connected to your system is
the system console, no matter what other terminals or displays are
connected to the system.
b. As a second choice, any bit-mapped display attached to an interface
addressed to $560000 is the system console. This is the recommended
choice for the HP 98726A / HP 98130A subsystem used as a console.
c. For a third choice, the first bit-mapped display found in DIO-II space
is recognized as the console. The search is from lowest to highest
memory location in DIO-II space.
■ PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION
a. When a Console Terminal is the system console, the HP 98726A can be
placed at any legal location and is treated as a peripheral.
b. When a bit-mapped display is the system console at $560000, then the
HP 98726A must be placed at any legal address that is not $560000
and jumper JP1 must be placed in the $800000 position. See previous
CAUTION note.
c. If a bit-mapped display is the system console and located in DIO-II
space, the HP 98726A must be addressed at a higher memory location
in DIO-II space. The jumper JP1 setting is ignored in DIO-II space.
5-122
Adding Interface Cards
HP 98726A Interface Card
4. Install the Interface Card in Your Computer or Expander.
a. Insert the card, component side up, into an empty I/O slot in your
computer. Tighten the thumb screws on the metal end plate until the
end plate is flush with the back of the computer.
b. If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise replace them.
5. Record the Select Code.
If you changed the select code from the default setting, record it on the
“Select Code Record” form on the Chapter 5, “Interface Cards” tab. If you
did not change the switches from their original settings, you need not worry
about a select code, since the internal code for the system console is used.
Note
Installation of the HP 98730A Graphics Display Station is
covered in Chapter 8, “Graphics Devices”.
Adding Interface Cards
5-123
HP 98726A Interface Card
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed the HP 98726A local Graphics Bus Interface.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use the
Graphics Display Station Interface with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or simply remember to refer here when you need
it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral or interface.
Using DIO-I
The setting in Table 5-2:6 is the default setting on the 98726A interface card.
This setting requires the jumper JP1 to be in the $200000 position on the
interface card. This is the recommended choice for the HP 98726A / HP 98730A
subsystem used as a console.
Table 5-26.
HP 98730A
Set to Internal Addressing Mode
Switch Setting
MSB ... LSB
CTL_BASE
(hex)
Select
Code
Path
Name
01010110
$560000
internal
/dev/display
5-124
Adding Interface Cards
File Major No.
Type
c
12
Minor
No.
0x000000
HP 98726A Interface Card
The settings in Table 5-27 require the jumper JP1 to be in the $800000 position
on the interface card.
Table 5-27.
HP 98730A
Set to External Addressing Mode (Select Code 10-11, 12-13,
14-15)*
Switch Setting
MSB ... LSB
CTL_BASE
(hex)
Select
Code
Path
Name
01101010
$6A0000
10-11
/dev/display
c
12
0x0e0700
01101100
$6C0000
12-13
/dev/display
c
12
0x0e0200
01101110
$6E0000
14-15
/dev/display
c
12
0x0e0200
*
File Major No.
Type
Minor
No.
Additional settings can be found by referring to the tables listed in the
Installation Note for this interface card.
Adding Interface Cards
5-125
HP 98726A Interface Card
Using DIO-II
The jumper JP1 is ignored when using DIO-II space.
Table 5-28.
HP 98730A Settings*
Switch Setting
MSB ... LSB
CTL_BASE
(hex)
Select
Code
Path
Name
10000101
$01400000
133
/dev/display
c
12
0x850200
10001001
$02400000
137
/dev/display
c
12
0x890200
10001101
$03400000
141
/dev/display
c
12
0x8d0200
*
5-126
File Major No.
Type
Minor
No.
Additional settings can be found by referring to the tables listed in the
Installation Note for this interface card.
Adding Interface Cards
Contents
6. Adding Mass Storage Devices
Determining HP-UX Minor Numbers . . . . . . . .
HP Series 6100 Model 600/A HP-IB CD-ROM Drive . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP Series 6300 Model 20GB/A Optical Disk Library System
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
HP Series 6300 Model 650/A Optical Disk Drive . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7907A Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7911, 7912, and 7914 Disk/Tape Drives . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7933/7935 Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7936H/7937H Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7941, 7942, 7945, 7946 Disk and Disk/Tape Drives . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-6
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-9
6-10
6-13
6-14
6-14
6-15
6-18
6-20
6-20
6-21
6-27
6-30
6-30
6-31
6-34
6-36
6-36
6-37
6-41
6-42
6-42
Contents-1
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7957A/7958A Disk Drives . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7974A Tape Drive . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7978A Tape Drive . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 9121/9122 Flexible Disk Drives . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 9125S/9127A Flexible Disk Drives . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 9144A Tape Drive . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 9153A/9154A Disk Drives . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7957/58/59B and 7961/62/63B Disk Drives
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
Contents-2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-43
6-46
6-48
6-48
6-49
6-51
6-53
6-53
6-54
6-56
6-59
6-59
6-60
6-62
6-65
6-65
6-66
6-68
6-71
6-71
6-72
6-74
6-76
6-76
6-77
6-80
6-87
6-87
6-88
6-91
6-93
6-93
6-94
6-97
6-104
6-104
6-105
6-107
HP 7957/58/59S SCSI Disk Drives . .
Description and Support . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . .
. . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
Description and Support . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . .
. . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-109
6-109
6-110
6-112
6-113
6-113
6-114
6-116
Contents-3
6
Adding Mass Storage Devices
■ HP Series 6100 Model 600/A HP-IB
■ HP 7957/58/59B and 7961/62/63B
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
CD-ROM Drive
HP Series 6300 Model 20GB/A Optical
Disk Library System
HP Series 6300 Model 650/A Optical
Disk Drive
HP 7907A Disk Drive
HP 7911, 7912, 7914 Disk/Tape Drives
HP 7933 and 7935 Disk Drives
HP 7936H and 7937H Disk Drives
HP 7941/42 and 7945/46 Disk/Tape
Drives
HP 7957A and 7958A Disk Drives
Disk Drives
HP 7957/58/59S SCSI Disk Drives
HP 7974A Tape Drive
HP 7978A Tape Drive
HP 7979A, 7980A, and 7980XC Tape
Drives
■ HP 9121 and 9122 Flexible Disk Drives
■ HP 9125S and 9127A Flexible Disk
Drives
■ HP 9133 and 9134 Disk Drives
■ HP 9144A Tape Drive
■ HP 9153A and 9154A Disk Drives
■ HP 9895A Disk Drive
Are You Adding Any of the Above Mass Storage Devices?
NO
Proceed to Chapter 7, “Printers”.
YES
Set mass storage device’s HP-IB address to 0, 2 or
3, and interface to preset select code (7 for built-in
HP-IB, 14 for HP 98625 Disk Interface, or 8 for HP
98624 HP-IB). Otherwise, see the next entry in this
chapter, “Determining HP-UX Minor Numbers”.
Then refer to the table of contents on the previous
page to find where your installation instructions begin.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-1
Determining HP-UX Minor Numbers
If you do not use:
■ An address of 0, 2 or 3 for your mass storage device, and/or
■ The preset select code for your HP 98625 (preset select code 14) Disk
Interface or HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (preset select code 8),
then the minor numbers given in the “Worksheet Entries” are incorrect.
To determine your correct minor number, follow this procedure:
1. Choose any worksheet entry table for your device as an example to work
from.
2. If Your Select Code Is Different: The first two digits to the right of the 0x
in the minor number indicate the select code of the interface the device
is connected to. Change these two digits to your select code value (in
hexadecimal). For example:
■ If your select code is 25, and the example minor number is 0x070010,
change the 07 to 19, giving the new minor number 0x190010. (Note: 19 is
the hexadecimal value for 25).
■ If your select code is 10, and the example minor number is 0x0e0200,
change the 0e to 0a, giving the new minor number 0x0a0200. (Note: 0a is
the hexadecimal value for 10).
3. If Your Address Is Different: The next two digits following the select code
digits indicate the address of the device. Change these two digits to your
address value (in hexadecimal). For example:
■ If your address is 5, and the example minor number is 0x070010, change
the 00 to 05, giving the new minor number 0x070510.
■ If your address is 7, and the example minor number is 0x0e0200, change
the 02 to 07, giving the new minor number 0x0e0700.
4. Change the minor number in each worksheet entry given for your device.
6-2
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP Series 6100 Model 600/A HP-IB CD-ROM Drive
Description and Support
The Model 600/A is a Command Set 80 (CS/80) device containing a Compact
Disc-Read Only Memory (CD-ROM) Drive. It connects to HP 9000 Series 300
computers via an HP-IB or built-in disk (HP-IB) interface.
As of version HP-UX 7.0, there is support for the ISO-9660 (or High Sierra
Group) data format for compact discs. Any compact disc that is not in this
format is not supported by Hewlett-Packard.
For more information about CD-ROM technology, please refer to the Series
300/800 HP-UX System Administration Concepts manual.
Model 600/A CD-ROM Drive
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
7.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-3
HP Series 6100 Model 610/A
CD-ROM Drive
Installation Procedure
Before connecting the CD-ROM drive to your computer, refer to the instructions
that came with the drive to:
■ Unpack the CD-ROM drive.
■ Check that your proposed site for the Model 600/A meets environmental
requirements.
■ Check the voltage setting.
■ Check the fuse.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
a. Bring your system down with the shutdown command.
b. Turn off your computer, monitor, and CD-ROM drive and unplug the
CD-ROM power cord.
2. Select your interface.
You may choose either of these:
■ HP 98625 Disk Interface
■ Built-in HP-IB Interface
3. Set the address.
Note
You should already be familiar with the HP-IB addresses that
are in use on your system. If you are not, please determine
HP-IB address availability now.
Recognize that multiple disks may exist on the same interface
card; however, no other type of device, for example, tape drive,
may be connected to the same card.
You are limited to four drives per HP-IB card.
■ Choose an available HP-IB address.
6-4
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP Series 6100 Model 610/A
CD-ROM Drive
■ On the back of the CD-ROM drive, find the address dial located in the
lower left corner.
■ Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, rotate the inner arrow of the dial to
point to the desired address.
4. Record the HP-IB address.
Make a note that the address you chose in step 4 of this procedure has been
used and is no longer available on the interface you selected.
5. Connect the Model 600/A to your computer.
a. Connect one end of an HP-IB cable to the HP-IB connector on the back
of the Model 600/A. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
b. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the HP-IB interface already has several cables connected
to it, connect your Model 600/A cable to one of the devices
connected to the interface.
6. Connect the power cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the “AC LINE” socket on the
back of the CD-ROM drive, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
Note
Detailed instructions for making the Model 600/A a part of the
host can be found in the HP Series 6100 Model 600/A HP-IB
CD-ROM User’s Guide, HP part number C1707-90000.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-5
HP Series 6100 Model 610/A
CD-ROM Drive
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your Model 600/A CD-ROM Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
CD-ROM Drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the
interface you will be using.
Table 6-1.
Model 600/A CD-ROM Drive
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
Device Name
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
Interleave
Factor
Model 600/A
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n00
0
Model 600/A
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n00
0
*
# is a number that identifies the CD-ROM drive (for example, 0 for the
root disk, 1 for the next disk installed. Replace # with any unique number,
and use the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (for
example, /dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0).
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation
procedure). Replace n with a 2 if the address was set to 2, use 3 if the
address set to 3, and so on.
6-6
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP Series 6100 Model 610/A
CD-ROM Drive
Table 6-2.
Model 600/A CD-ROM Drive
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Device Name
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
Interleave
Factor
Model 600/A
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n00
0
Model 600/A
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n00
0
*
# is a number that identifies the CD-ROM drive (for example, 0 for the
root disk, 1 for the next disk installed. Replace # with any unique number,
and use the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (for
example, /dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0).
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation
procedure). Replace n with a 2 if the address was set to 2, use 3 if the
address set to 3, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-7
HP Series 6300 Model 20GB/A
Optical Disk Library System
NOTE!
The Model 20GB/A Optical Disk Library System should be
installed by HP Customer Engineers. The installation cost is
included in the purchase price of the unit.
Description and Support
The Model 20GB/A Optical Disk Library System is a direct access secondary
storage (DASS) peripheral which allows multiple rewritable optical disks to
be shared between one or two optical disk drives. The Optical Disk Library
System can hold as many as 32 disks-each disk can store 325 Mbytes of data
per side. The Optical Disk Library System connects to a Series 300 computer
with a SCSI interface and can be accessed as a conventional magnetic disk
drive.
Model 20GB/A Optical Disk Library System
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
NOTE!
6-8
on Release
with Model
6.5 or later
all Series 300
Your HP Customer Engineer will unpack and install your
Optical Disk Library System for you. For these details, please
refer to the unpacking and installation procedures that came
with the Model 20GB/A.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP Series 6300 Model 650/A Optical Disk Drive
Description and Support
The Model 650/A is a stand-alone 5.25 in Rewritable Optical disk drive. The
removable Magneto-Optical (MO) disks can store 650 Mbytes of data (325
Mbytes per side) and complies with the Continuous-Composite format. The
disk drive connects to Series 300 computers with a SCSI interface and can be
accessed as a conventional magnetic disk drive.
Model 650/A
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
6.5 or later
all Series 300
It is supported as a boot device (not recommended) or as a mass storage device.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-9
HP Series 6300 Model 650/A
Optical Disk Drive
Installation Procedure
Before you connect your optical disk drive to your computer, refer to the
manual(s) that came with your disk drive to:
■ Unpack the disk drive.
■ Check that your proposed site for the HP Series 6300 Model 650/A meets
environmental requirements.
■ Check the voltage setting.
■ Check the fuse.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer off, if it is not already off.
2. Set the Address.
a. Locate the SCSI ID and operation mode switch (see Figure 6-1) on the
rear panel of the disk drive.
Figure 6-1.
SCSI ID and
Operation Mode Switch
b. Verify that switches 1 through 5 are in the “OFF” position.
c. Switches 6 through 8 are used to set the Address. The Address can be set
from 0 to 6, with 0 being the default setting.
6-10
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP Series 6300 Model 650/A
Optical Disk Drive
Note
You cannot use address 7 because the host system SCSI
controller uses address 7.
Table 6-3.
SCSI Settings
SCSI Address
Switch 6
Switch 7
Switch 8
0
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
On
2
Off
On
Off
3
Off
On
On
4
On
Off
Off
5
On
Off
On
6
On
On
Off
■ Address 0 should be used if this address is not currently used by any
other device on the bus.
■ If Address 0 is used by another device, select any other bus address not
used by another device.
3. Connect the Disk Drive to Your Computer.
a. Turn your computer and disk drive off, if they are not already off.
b. Attach the cable coming from the SCSI interface of your computer to
one of the two connectors on the rear panel of the disk drive (it does not
matter which one). Press in fully.
c. If either connector on the rear panel is not being used to connect
to another SCSI device, the unused connector must be terminated.
Attach the terminator (supplied with the SCSI interface card) to the
unused connector on the disk drive. Press in fully. If you do not have
a terminator, you will need to order one. The HP part number is
1252-2297.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-11
HP Series 6300 Model 650/A
Optical Disk Drive
d. Plug in power cord to the rear panel of the disk drive.
e. Turn on the power to the disk drive BEFORE turning on the power to
the computer or the computer will not recognize the disk drive.
6-12
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP Series 6300 Model 650/A
Optical Disk Drive
Worksheet Entries
Now you have installed your optical disk drive.
You are ready to access the driver using HP-UX.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
optical disk drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for
the device file type you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 6-4.
Model 650/A Optical Disk Drive
Connected to HP 98265A Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
Device Name
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number*
Model 650/A
/dev/dsk/mo
b
7
0x0e0n00
Model 650/A
/dev/rdsk/mo
c
47
0x0e0n00
*
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the
address was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-13
HP 7907A Disk Drive
Description and Support
The HP 7907A is a Command Set 80 (CS/80) device containing a 20.5 Mbyte
fixed disk and a 20.5 Mbyte removable cartridge disk. It connects to Series 300
computers via an HP-IB or Disk interface.
HP 7907A Disk Drive
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
5.0 or later
6-14
Adding Mass Storage Devices
with Model
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev. A or later
Installation Procedure
HP 7907A Disk Drive
Before you connect your disk drive to your computer, refer to the manual(s)
that came with the disk drive to:
■ Unpack the disk drive.
■ Check that your proposed site for the HP 7907A meets environmental
requirements.
■ Check the voltage setting.
■ Check the fuse.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and disk drive off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Select one of the following interfaces, listed in order of preference for
optimum disk performance:
■ HP 98625 Disk Interface
■ Built-in HP-IB Interface
3. Set the Address.
a. On the back of the disk drive, find the set of four switches labeled “HP-IB
ADDRESS.”
b. Set the HP-IB address:
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive (besides this HP 7907A)
already connected to the interface, set the “HP-IB ADDRESS”
switches to 2 as shown in Figure 6-2, unless address 2 has been used
elsewhere.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-15
HP 7907A Disk Drive
Figure 6-2.
Address 2
If there are two other disk or tape drives (besides this HP 7907A) already
connected to the interface, set the “HP-IB ADDRESS” switches to 3 as shown in
Figure 6-3, unless address 3 has been used elsewhere. Refer to the manual that
came with your disk drive if you need additional switch settings.
Figure 6-3.
Address 3
6-16
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7907A Disk Drive
4. Connect the HP 7901A to Your Computer.
a. Find the HP-IB cable provided with the disk drive.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket on the back of
the HP 7907A. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect your HP 7907A cable to one of the other devices on the
interface.
5. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the “AC LINE” socket on the
back of the disk drive, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
6. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 0 (or the alternate address you set in an earlier
step in this installation procedure) has been used and is no longer available
on the interface you selected. Use the “Address Record” form on the
Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-17
HP 7907A Disk Drive
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 7907A Disk Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your disk
drives with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the select
code you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 6-5.
HP 7907A Disk
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
Interleave
Factor
HP 7907A - Fixed Disk
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n00
1
HP 7907A - Fixed Disk
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n00
1
HP 7907A - Removable Disk
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n10
1
HP 7907A - Removable Disk
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n10
1
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for the
next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and use the same
number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g., /dev/dsk/1s0 and
/dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
6-18
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7907A Disk Drive
Table 6-6.
HP 7907A
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
Interleave
Factor
HP 7907A - Fixed Disk
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n00
1
HP 7907A - Fixed Disk
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n00
1
HP 7907A - Removable Disk
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n10
1
HP 7907A - Removable Disk
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n10
1
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for the
next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and use the same
number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g., /dev/dsk/1s0 and
/dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-19
HP 7911, 7912, and 7914 Disk/Tape Drives
NOTE!
These disk/tape drives will be installed by HP Customer
Engineers. Installation cost is included in the purchase price of the
unit.
Description and Support
These disk/tape drives are Command Set 80 (CS/80) devices.
HP 7911P/R, 7912P/R, 7914CT, 7914P/R
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
6-20
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev. A or later
Adding Mass Storage Devices
Installation Procedure
HP 7911/7912/7914 Disk/Tape Drives
Your HP Customer Engineer will unpack and install your disk/tape drive for
you. The following procedure describes how to connect your disk/tape drive to
your Series 300 computer.
Caution
Do not attempt to operate the unit until it is moved to the
installation site and the spindle and actuator are unlocked. Do
not apply any sudden mechanical shocks to the unit.
1. Play It Safe.
a. Make arrangements with your HP Customer Engineer to have your
disk/tape drive unpacked and installed.
b. Turn your computer and disk drive off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Disk’s Interface.
Select one of the following interfaces, listed in order of preference for
optimum disk performance:
■ HP 98625 Disk Interface
■ Built-in HP-IB Interface
3. Select Your Tape’s Interface. (Dual Controller Only).
SKIP?
If you have dual controllers, continue with this step; otherwise
skip to the next numbered step.
a. HP-UX Recommendations:
■ If you selected an HP 98625 Disk Interface for your disk, use the
built-in HP-IB Interface for your tape.
■ If you selected the built-in HP-IB interface for your disk, use an HP
98624A HP-IB Interface for your tape (if available).
■ Otherwise, use your built-in HP-IB interface for both disk and tape.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-21
HP 7911/7912/7914 Disk/Tape Drives
b. BASIC and Pascal Workstation Recommendations:
■ Connect the tape drive to the HP 98625 Disk Interface or to the
built-in HP-IB interface.
4. Set the Disk Address.
a. On the back of the disk drive, find the set of three switches labeled
“HP-IB DISC.”
b. Set the HP-IB address:
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive (besides this HP
7911/12/14) already connected to the interface, set the “HP-IB DISC”
switches to 2 as shown in Figure 6-4, unless address 2 has been used
elsewhere.
Figure 6-4.
Address 2
■ If there are two other disk or tape drives (besides this HP 7911/12/14)
already connected to the interface, set the “HP-IB DISC” switches to
3 as shown in Figure 6-5, unless address 2 has been used elsewhere.
Refer to the manual that came with your disk drive if you need
additional switch settings.
6-22
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7911/7912/7914 Disk/Tape Drives
Figure 6-5.
Address 3
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-23
HP 7911/7912/7914 Disk/Tape Drives
5. Set the Tape Address (Dual Controller Only).
SKIP?
If you have dual controllers, continue with this step; otherwise,
skip to the next numbered step.
a. On the back of the disk drive, find the set of three switches labeled
“HP-IB TAPE.”
b. Set the HP-IB tape address, making sure that you do not set it to the
same address used by the 7911/12/14 disk drive if both disk and tape
share the same interface:
■ If this is the first (or only) disk or tape drive you are connecting to the
interface, set the “HP-IB TAPE” switches to 0 as shown in Figure 6-6,
unless address 0 has been used elsewhere.
Figure 6-6.
Address 0
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive (besides this HP
7911/12/14 tape) already connected to the interface, set the “HP-IB
TAPE” switches to 2 as shown in Figure 6-7, unless address 2 has been
used elsewhere.
Figure 6-7.
Address 2
6-24
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7911/7912/7914 Disk/Tape Drives
■ If there are two other disk or tape drives (besides this HP 7911/12/14
tape) already connected to the interface, set the “HP-IB TAPE”
switches to 3 as shown in Figure 6-8, unless address 3 has been used
elsewhere. Refer to the manual that came with your disk/tape drive
for additional switch settings.
Figure 6-8.
Address 3
6. Connect the Disk to Your Computer.
a. Find the HP-IB cable provided with the disk/tape drive.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket to the right of
the “HP-IB DISC” address switches. Tighten the thumb screws to secure
the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect your HP 7911/12/14 cable to one of the other devices on
the interface.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-25
HP 7911/7912/7914 Disk/Tape Drives
7. Connect the Tape to Your Computer (Dual Controller Only).
SKIP?
If you have dual controllers, continue with this step; otherwise,
skip to the next numbered step.
a. Find the additional HP-IB cable provided with the disk/tape drive.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket to the right
of the “HP-IB TAPE” address switches. Tighten the thumb screws to
secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect your HP 7911/12/14 cable to one of the other devices
on the interface.
8. Connect the Power Cord.
a. Connect the female end of the power cord to the “AC LINE” socket
on the back of the disk drive, and connect the other end to your power
outlet.
b. Position the drive in its operating location and lower the leveling feet
until the casters carry no weight. Ensure that there is at least three
inches of clearance behind the drive.
9. Record the Address.
Make a note that the address(es) used for your disk/tape drive are no longer
available on the interface(es) you selected. Use the “Address Record” form
on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
6-26
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7911/7912/7914 Disk/Tape Drives
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 7911/12/14 Disk/Tape Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
disk/tape drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the
interface and select code you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Note
If you have a dual controller device, refer to the separate tape
controller tables for your tape minor number.
Table 6-7.
HP 7911/12/14
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
Interleave
Factor
HP 7911/12/14 - Disk
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n00
1
HP 7911/12/14 - Disk
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n00
1
HP 7911/12/14 - Tape
/dev/ct/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n10
1
HP 7911/12/14 - Tape
/dev/rct/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n10
1
Device Name
*
Replace # with any unique number, and use the same number in both the
/dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g., /dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0).
Record the numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-27
HP 7911/7912/7914 Disk/Tape Drives
Table 6-8.
HP 7911/12/14
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
Interleave
Factor
HP 7911/12/14 - Disk
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n00
1
HP 7911/12/14 - Disk
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n00
1
HP 7911/12/14 - Tape
/dev/ct/#s0
b
0
0x070n10
1
HP 7911/12/14 - Tape
/dev/rct/#s0
c
4
0x070n10
1
Device Name
*
Replace # with any unique number, and use the same number in both the
/dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g., /dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0).
Record the numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
6-28
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7911/7912/7914 Disk/Tape Drives
Table 6-9.
Separate Tape Controller
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
Interleave
Factor
HP 7911/12/14 - Tape
/dev/ct/#s0
b
0
0x070n00
1
HP 7911/12/14 - Tape
/dev/rct/#s0
c
4
0x070n00
1
Device Name
*
Replace # with any unique number, and use the same number in both the
/dev/ct and /dev/rct entries (e.g., /dev/ct/1s0 and /dev/rct/1s0). Record
the numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
Table 6-10.
Separate Tape Controller
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
Interleave
Factor
HP 7911/12/14 - Tape
/dev/ct/#s0
b
0
0x080n00
1
HP 7911/12/14 - Tape
/dev/rct/#s0
c
4
0x080n00
1
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the tape drive. Replace # with any unique
number, and use the same number in both the /dev/ct and /dev/rct entries
(e.g., /dev/ct/1s0 and /dev/rct/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-29
HP 7933/7935 Disk Drives
NOTE!
These disk/tape units are to be installed by HP Customer
Engineers. The installation cost is included in the purchase
price of the unit.
Description and Support
These disk drives are Command Set 80 (CS/80) devices.
HP 7933/7935 Disk Drives
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
6-30
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Mass Storage Devices
Installation Procedure
HP 7933/7935 Disk Drives
Your HP Customer Engineer will unpack and install your disk drive for you.
The following procedure describes how to connect your disk drive to your Series
300 computer.
Caution
Do not attempt to operate the unit until it is moved to the
installation site and the spindle and actuator are unlocked.
Do not apply any sudden mechanical shocks to the unit.
1. Play It Safe.
a. Make arrangements with your HP Customer Engineer to have your disk
drive unpacked and installed.
b. Turn your computer and disk drive off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Select one of the following interfaces, listed in order of preference for
optimum disk performance:
■ HP 98625 Disk Interface
■ Built-in HP-IB Interface
3. Set the Address.
a. On the back of the disk drive, find the set of three switches labeled
“HP-IB PRIMARY PORT.”
b. Set the HP-IB address:
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive (besides this HP 7933/35)
already connected to the interface, set the “HP-IB PRIMARY PORT”
switches to 2 as shown in Figure 6-9, unless address 2 has been used
elsewhere.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-31
HP 7933/7935 Disk Drives
Figure 6-9.
Address 2
■ If there are two other disk or tape drives (besides this HP 7933/35)
already connected to the interface, set the “HP-IB PRIMARY PORT”
switches on your HP 7933/35 to 3 as shown in Figure 6-10, unless
address 3 has been used elsewhere.
Figure 6-10.
Address 3
4. Connect the Disk to Your Computer.
a. Find the HP-IB cable provided with the disk drive.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket on the back of
the disk drive. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
6-32
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7933/7935 Disk Drives
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect your HP 7933/35 cable to one of the other devices on
the interface.
5. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the back
of the disk drive, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
6. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 0 (or the alternate address you set in an earlier
step in this installation procedure) has been used and is no longer available
on the interface you selected. Use the “Address Record” form on the
Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-33
HP 7933/7935 Disk Drives
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 7933/35 Disk Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your disk
drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the interface
you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 6-11.
HP 7933/35 Disk
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
Device Name
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
Interleave
Factor
HP 7933/35
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n00
1
HP 7933/35
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n00
1
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for the
next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and use the same
number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g., /dev/dsk/1s0 and
/dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
6-34
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7933/7935 Disk Drives
Table 6-12.
HP 7933/35
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Device Name
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
Interleave
Factor
HP 7933/35
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n00
1
HP 7933/35
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n00
1
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for the
next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and use the same
number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g., /dev/dsk/1s0 and
/dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-35
HP 7936H/7937H Disk Drives
NOTE!
These HP 7936H and 7937H disk drives are to be installed by
an HP Customer Engineer. The installation cost is included in
the purchase price of the unit.
Description and Support
These disk drives are Command Set (CS/80) devices.
HP 7936H and 7937H
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
6-36
on Release
with Model
5.1 or later
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev. A or later
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7936H/7937H Disk Drives
Installation Procedure
Your HP Customer Engineer will unpack and install your disk drive for you. The
following procedure describes how to connect your disk drive to your Series 300
computer.
Caution
Do not attempt to operate the unit until it is moved to the
installation site and the spindle and actuator are unlocked.
Do not apply any sudden mechanical shocks to the unit.
1. Play It Safe.
a. Make arrangements with your HP Customer Engineer to have your disk
drive unpacked and installed.
b. Turn your computer and disk drive off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
The HP 7936H and 7937H disk drives are supported only on a high-speed
HP-IB interface such as the HP 98625A/B Disk Interface.
3. Set the Address.
a. On the back of the disk drive, find the set of four switches in the upper
left-hand corner.
b. Set the HP-IB address:
■ If this is the first or only disk or tape drive connected to the interface,
set the switches to 0 as shown in Figure 6-11.
Figure 6-11.
Address 0
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-37
HP 7936H/7937H Disk Drives
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive (besides this HP 7936H
or 7937H) already connected to the interface, set the switches to 2 as
shown in Figure 6-12, unless address 2 has been used elsewhere.
Figure 6-12.
Address 2
■ If there are two other disk or tape drives (besides this HP 7936H or
7937H) already connected to the interface, set the switches to 3 as
shown in Figure 6-13, unless address 3 has been used elsewhere.
Figure 6-13.
Address 3
4. Connect the Disk Drive Your Computer.
a. Find the HP-IB cable provided with the disk drive.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket on the back of
the disk drive. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
6-38
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7936H/7937H Disk Drives
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect your HP 7936H or 7937H cable to one of the other devices
on the interface.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-39
HP 7936H/7937H Disk Drives
5. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the back
of the disk drive, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
6. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 0 (or the alternate address you set in an earlier
step of this installation procedure) has been used and is no longer available
on the interface you selected. Use the “Address Record” form on the
Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
6-40
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7936H/7937H Disk Drives
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed you HP 7936H or 7937H Disk Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your disk
drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the device file
type you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (Worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 6-13.
HP 7936/37H
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
Interleave
Factor
HP 7936/37H
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n00
1
HP 7936/37H
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n00
1
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for the
next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and use the same
number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g., /dev/dsk/1s0 and
/dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-41
HP 7941, 7942, 7945, 7946 Disk and Disk/Tape Drives
Description and Support
The HP 7941 and HP 7945 are Command Set 80 (CS/80) disks. The HP 7942
and HP 7946 contain a cartridge tape drive in addition to the disk drive.
HP 7941, 7942, 7945 and 7946
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
6-42
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev. A or later
Adding Mass Storage Devices
Installation Procedure
HP 7941, 7942, 7945, 7946
Disk and Disk/Tape Drives
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 7941, 7942, 7945
and 7946 to your Series 200/300 computer. Before you do this, however, refer
to the manual(s) that came with the drive to:
■ Unpack the drive.
■ Check the voltage selector switch.
■ Check the fuse value.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and disk drive off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Select one of the following interfaces, listed in order of preference for optimum
disk performance:
■ HP 98625 Disk Interface
■ Built-in HP-IB Interface
3. Set the Address.
a. On the back of the disk drive, find the set of four switches labeled
“ADDRESS.”
b. Set the HP-IB address:
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive (besides this HP
7941/42/45/46) already connected to the interface, set the
“ADDRESS” switches to 2 as shown in Figure 6-14, unless address 2
has been used elsewhere.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-43
HP 7941, 7942, 7945, 7946
Disk and Disk/Tape Drives
Figure 6-14.
Address 2
6-44
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7941, 7942, 7945, 7946
Disk and Disk/Tape Drives
■ If there are two other disk or tape drives (besides this HP
7941/42/45/46) already connected to the interface, set the
“ADDRESS” switches to 3 as shown in Figure 6-15, unless address 3
has been used elsewhere.
Figure 6-15.
Address 3
4. Connect the Disk Drive to Your Computer.
a. Find the HP-IB cable provided with the disk drive.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket on the back of
the disk drive. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect your HP 7941/42/45/46 cable to one of the other
devices on the interface.
5. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the back
of the disk drive, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
6. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 0 (or the alternate address you set in an earlier
step of this installation procedure) has been used and is no longer available
on the interface you selected. Use the “Address Record” form on the
Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-45
HP 7941, 7942, 7945, 7946
Disk and Disk/Tape Drives
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 7941/42/45/46 Disk Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your disk
drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the interface
you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 6-14.
HP 7941/42/45/46
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
Interleave
Factor
HP 7941/42/45/46 - Disk
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n00
1
HP 7941/42/45/46 - Disk
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n00
1
HP 7942/46 - Tape
/dev/ct/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n10
1
HP 7942/46 - Tape
/dev/rct/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n10
1
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for the
next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and use the same
number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g., /dev/dsk/1s0 and
/dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
6-46
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7941, 7942, 7945, 7946
Disk and Disk/Tape Drives
Table 6-15.
HP 7941/42/45/46
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
Interleave
Factor
HP 7941/42/45/46 - Disk
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n00
1
HP 7941/42/45/46 - Disk
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n00
1
HP 7942/46 - Tape
/dev/ct/#s0
b
0
0x070n10
1
HP 7942/46 - Tape
/dev/rct/#s0
c
4
0x070n10
1
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for the
next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and use the same
number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g., /dev/dsk/1s0 and
/dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-47
HP 7957A/7958A Disk Drives
Description and Support
These disk drives are Command Set (CS/80) devices.
HP 7957A and 7958A Disk Drives
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
6-48
on Release
with Model
5.1 or later
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev. A or later
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7957A/7958A Disk Drives
Installation Procedure
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 7957A and
7958A to your Series 300 computer. Before you do this however, refer to the
manual(s) that came with the drive to:
■ Unpack the drive.
■ Check the voltage selector switch.
■ Check the fuse value.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and disk drive off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Select one of the following interfaces, listed in order of preference for
optimum disk performance:
■ HP 98625 Disk Interface
■ Built-in HP-IB Interface
3. Set the Address.
a. On the back of the 7957A/7958A disk drive, find the address wheel
labeled “ADDRESS” in the upper left corner.
b. Set the HP-IB address:
■ If this is the first disk or tape drive you are installing on the interface,
set the address wheel to 0, unless address 0 has been used elsewhere.
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive (besides this
7957A/7958A) already connected to the interface, set the address wheel
to 2, unless address 2 has been used elsewhere.
■ If there are two other disk or tape drives (besides this 7957A/7958A)
already connected to the interface, set the address wheel to 3, unless
address 3 has been used elsewhere. If it has, choose any unused
address.
4. Connect the Disk Drive to Your Computer.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-49
HP 7957A/7958A Disk Drives
a. Find the HP-IB cable provided with the disk drive.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket on the back of
the disk drive. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect your 7957A/7958A cable to one of the other devices on
the interface.
5. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the back
of the disk drive, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
6. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 0 (or the alternate address you set in an earlier
step of this installation procedure) has been used and is no longer available
on the interface you selected. Use the “Address Record” form on the
Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
6-50
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7957A/7958A Disk Drives
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your 7957A/7958A Disk Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your disk
drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the interface
you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 6-16.
HP7957A/7958A
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
Interleave
Factor
HP 7957A/7958A
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n00
1
HP 7957A/7958A
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n00
1
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for the
next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and use the same
number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g., /dev/dsk/1s0 and
/dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-51
HP 7957A/7958A Disk Drives
Table 6-17.
HP 7957A/7958A
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
Interleave
Factor
HP 7957A/7958A
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n00
1
HP 7957A/7958A
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n00
1
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for the
next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and use the same
number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g., /dev/dsk/1s0 and
/dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
6-52
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7974A Tape Drive
NOTE!
The HP 7974A Tape Drive is to be installed by an HP
Customer Engineer. The installation cost is included in the
purchase price of the unit.
Description and Support
The HP 7974A is a 100/50 ips 1/2 -inch 9-track open-reel tape drive supplied
in an upright cabinet. It supports 1600 cpi Phase Encoded (PE) format and
optionally 800 cpi NRZI format. The HP 7974A operates in either start/stop
(50 ips) or streaming (100 ips) mode depending on whether data is available on
the bus.
HP 7974A Tape Drive
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-53
HP 7974A Tape Drive
Installation Procedure
Your HP Customer Engineer will unpack and install your tape drive for you.
The following procedure describes how to connect your tape drive to your
Series 300 computer.
Caution
Do not attempt to operate the unit until your HP Customer
Engineer has installed the unit for you.
1. Play It Safe.
a. Make arrangements with your HP Customer Engineer to have your tape
drive installed.
b. Turn your computer off, if it is not already off.
c. Turn your HP 7974A Tape Drive on.
2. Select Your Interface.
Select one of the following interfaces, listed in order of preference for
optimum tape performance:
■ HP 98625 Disk Interface
■ Built-in HP-IB Interface
3. Set the Address.
a. Press the OFFLINE RESET button until the ONLINE indicator light
turns off.
b. Press the ADDRESS button to display the current address.
c. Set the address:
■ If the HP 7974A is the first disk or tape drive you are connecting to the
interface, press the UNITS button until 0 appears in the display, unless
address 0 has been used elsewhere.
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive (besides this HP 7974A)
already connected to the interface, press the UNITS button until 2
appears in the display, unless address 2 has been used elsewhere.
6-54
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7974A Tape Drive
■ If there are two other disk or tape drives (besides this HP 7974A)
already connected to the interface, press the UNITS button until 3
appears in the display, unless address 3 has been used elsewhere. If it
has, choose any unused address.
d. Press the Enter button to assign the new address.
e. Press the ADDRESS button to exit the address select mode.
4. Connect the Tape Drive to Your Computer.
a. Find the HP-IB cable provided with the tape drive.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket on the inside
of the cabinet at the top. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the
connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect your HP 7974A cable to one of the other devices on the
interface.
5. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 0 (or the alternate address you chose in an earlier
step of this installation procedure) has been used and is no longer available
on the interface you selected. Use the “Address Record” form on the Chapter
6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-55
HP 7974A Tape Drive
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 7974A Tape Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
tape drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the
interface you are using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
6-56
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7974A Tape Drive
Table 6-18.
HP 7974A Tape Drive
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
Device
Name
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
HP 7974A, 800 cpi, Berkeley, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n03
HP 7974A, 800 cpi, Berkeley, autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n02
HP 7974A, 800 cpi, AT&T, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n01
HP 7974A, 800 cpi, AT&T, autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n00
HP 7974A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#sO
c
9
0x0e0n43
HP 7974A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley, autorewind /dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n42
HP 7974A, 1600 cpi, AT&T, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n41
HP 7974A, 1600 cpi, AT&T, autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n40
*
# is a number that identifies the magnetic tape drive. Replace # with any
unique number (e.g., /dev/rmt/0s0 for the first mag tape). Record the numbers
on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-57
HP 7974A Tape Drive
Table 6-19.
HP 7974A Tape Drive
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Device
Name
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
HP 7974A, 800 cpi, Berkeley, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n03
HP 7974A, 800 cpi, Berkeley, autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n02
HP 7974A, 800 cpi, AT&T, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n01
HP 7974A, 800 cpi, AT&T, autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n00
HP 7974A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#sO
c
9
0x070n43
HP 7974A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley, autorewind /dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n42
HP 7974A, 1600 cpi, AT&T, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n41
HP 7974A, 1600 cpi, AT&T, autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n40
*
# is a number that identifies the magnetic tape drive. Replace # with any
unique number (e.g., /dev/rmt/0s0 for the first mag tape). Record the numbers
on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
6-58
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7974A Tape Drive
HP 7978A Tape Drive
NOTE!
The HP 7978A Tape Drive is to be installed by an HP
Customer Engineer. The installation cost is included in the
purchase price of the unit.
Description and Support
The HP 7978A is a 75 ips 1/2 -inch 9-track open-reel tape drive supplied in an
upright cabinet. It supports 1600 cpi Phase Encoded (PE) format and 6250
cpi Group Code Recording (GCR) format. The HP 7978A operates only in
streaming mode.
HP 7978A Tape Drive
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-59
HP 7978A Tape Drive
Installation Procedure
Your HP Customer Engineer will unpack and install your tape drive for you.
The following procedure describes how to connect your tape drive to your Series
200/300 computer.
Caution
Do not attempt to operate the unit until your HP Customer
Engineer has installed the unit for you.
1. Play It Safe.
a. Make arrangements with your HP Customer Engineer to have your tape
drive installed.
b. Turn your computer off, if it is not already off.
c. Turn your HP 7978A Tape Drive on.
2. Select Your Interface.
Select one of the following interfaces, listed in order of preference for
optimum tape performance:
■ HP 98625 Disk Interface
■ Built-in HP-IB Interface
3. Set the Address.
a. Press the OFFLINE button until the OFFLINE indicator light turns on.
b. Press the TEST ADDRESS button twice to make the ADDRESS
indicator light turn on.
c. Press the ENTER button. The current address will be displayed to the
right of the ENTER button.
d. Set the address:
■ If the HP 7978A is the first disk or tape drive your are connecting to
the interface, press the TEST ADDRESS button until 0 appears in the
display, unless address 0 has already been used.
6-60
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7978A Tape Drive
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive (besides this HP 7978A)
already connected to the interface, press the TEST ADDRESS button
until 2 appears in the display, unless address 2 has already been used.
■ If there are two other disk or tape drives (besides this HP 7978A)
already connected to the interface, press the TEST ADDRESS button
until 3 appears in the display, unless address 3 has already been used.
If it has, choose any unused address.
e. Press the ENTER button to assign the new address.
f.
Press the ONLINE button to turn on the ONLINE indicator light.
4. Connect the Tape Drive to Your Computer.
a. Find the HP-IB cable provided with the tape drive.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket on the back of
the tape drive. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect your HP 7978A cable to one of the other devices on the
interface.
5. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 0 (or the alternate address you set in an earlier
step of this installation procedure) has been used and is no longer available
on the interface you selected. Use the “Address Record” form on the
Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-61
HP 7978A Tape Drive
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 7978A Tape Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your disk
drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the interface
you are using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
6-62
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7978A Tape Drive
Table 6-20.
HP 7978A Tape Drive
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n83
HP 7978A, 6250 cpi, Berkeley, autorewind /dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n82
HP 7978A, 6250 cpi, AT&T, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n81
HP 7978A, 6250 cpi, AT&T, autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n80
HP 7978A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#sO
c
9
0x0e0n43
HP 7978A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley, autorewind /dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n42
HP 7978A, 1600 cpi, AT&T, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n41
HP 7978A, 1600 cpi, AT&T, autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n40
Device Name
HP 7978A, 6250 cpi, Berkeley, no rewind
*
# is a number that identifies the magnetic tape drive. Replace # with any
unique number (e.g., /dev/rmt/0s0 for the first mag tape). Record the
numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-63
HP 7978A Tape Drive
Table 6-21.
HP 7978A Tape Drive
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n83
HP 7978A, 6250 cpi, Berkeley, autorewind /dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n82
HP 7978A, 6250 cpi, AT&T, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n81
HP 7978A, 6250 cpi, AT&T, autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n80
HP 7978A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#sO
c
9
0x070n43
HP 7978A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley, autorewind /dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n42
HP 7978A, 1600 cpi, AT&T, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n41
HP 7978A, 1600 cpi, AT&T, autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n40
Device Name
HP 7978A, 6250 cpi, Berkeley, no rewind
*
# is a number that identifies the magnetic tape drive. Replace # with any
unique number (e.g., /dev/rmt/0s0 for the first mag tape). Record the
numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
6-64
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9121/9122 Flexible Disk Drives
Description and Support
The HP 9121 records data on a single-sided 3 1/2 -inch disk and the HP 9122
records data on double-sided or single-sided 3 1/2 -inch disks. The HP 9121S
and HP 9122S have a single disk drive, while the HP 9121D and the HP 9122D
have two disk drives in the unit.
HP 9121 and 9122 Flexible Disk Drives
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev. A or later
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-65
HP 9121/9122 Flexible Disk Drives
Installation Procedure
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 9121 and 9122 to
your Series 300 computer. Before you do this, however, refer to the manual(s)
that came with the drive to:
■ Unpack the drive.
■ Check the voltage switch setting.
■ Check the fuse value..
And now, the installation procedures ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and disk drive off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Use either the built-in HP-IB interface or an HP 98624A HP-IB
3. Set the Address.
a. On the back of the disk drive, find the set of four switches labeled
“ADDRESS.”
b. Set the HP-IB address:
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive (besides this HP 9121/22)
already connected to the interface, set the “ADDRESS” switches to 2
as shown in Figure 6-16, unless address 2 has already been used.
Figure 6-16.
Address 2
6-66
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9121/9122 Flexible Disk Drives
■ If there are two other disk or tape drives (besides this HP 9121/22)
already connected to the interface, set the “ADDRESS” switches to 3
as shown in Figure 6-17, unless address 3 has already been used. Refer
to the manual that came with your disk drive for additional switch
settings.
Figure 6-17.
Address 3
c. Connect the Disk Drive to Your Computer.
i.
Find the HP-IB cable provided with the disk drive.
ii. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket on the back
of the disk drive. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
iii. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect your HP 9121/22 cable to one of the other devices on
the interface.
4. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the “AC LINE” socket on the
back of the disk drive, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
5. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 0 (or the alternate address you set in an earlier
step of this installation procedure) has been used and is no longer available
on the interface you selected. Use the “Address Record” form on the
Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-67
HP 9121/9122 Flexible Disk Drives
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 9121/22 Flexible Disk Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your disk
drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the interface
you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
6-68
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9121/9122 Flexible Disk Drives
Table 6-22.
HP 9121/22 Flexible Disk Drive
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Device
Name
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor
HP 9121 - Left
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
2
0x070n00
2
HP 9121 - Left
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
11
0x070n00
2
HP 9121D - Right
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
2
0x070n10
2
HP 9121D - Right
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
11
0x070n10
2
HP 9122 - Left
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n00
2
HP 9122 - Left
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n00
2
HP 9122D - Right
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n10
2
HP 9122D - Right
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n10
2
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for
the next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and
use the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g.,
/dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the
address was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-69
HP 9121/9122 Flexible Disk Drives
Table 6-23.
HP 9121/22 Flexible Disk Drive
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
Device
Name
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor
HP 9121 - Left
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
2
0x080n00
2
HP 9121 - Left
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
11
0x080n00
2
HP 9121D - Right
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
2
0x080n10
2
HP 9121D - Right
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
11
0x080n10
2
HP 9122 - Left
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n00
2
HP 9122 - Left
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n00
2
HP 9122D - Right
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n10
2
HP 9122D - Right
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n10
2
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for
the next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and
use the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g.,
/dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the
address was set to 2, and so on.
6-70
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9125S/9127A Flexible Disk Drives
Description and Support
The HP 9125S and 9127A are single 5 1/4 -inch flexible disk drives.
HP 9125S, 9127A Flexible Disk Drives
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev. A or later
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-71
HP 9125S/9127A Flexible Disk Drives
Installation Procedure
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 9125S and HP
9127A to your Series 300 computer. Before you do this, however, refer to the
manual(s) that came with the drive to:
■ Unpack the drive.
■ Check the voltage switch setting.
■ Check the fuse value.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and disk drive off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Use either the built-in HP-IB interface or an HP 98624A HP-IB Interface.
3. Set the Address.
a. On the back of the disk drive, find the HP-IB address wheel, labeled
“ADDRESS.”
b. Set the HP-IB address:
■ If this is the first disk or tape drive you are connecting to this
interface, set the “ADDRESS” wheel to 0, unless address 0 has already
been used.
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive (besides this HP 9125S or
9127A) already connected to the interface, set the “ADDRESS” wheel
to 2, unless address 2 has already been used.
■ If there are two other disk or tape drives (besides this HP 9125S or
9127A) already connected to the interface, set the “ADDRESS” wheel
to 3, unless address 3 has already been used. If it has, choose any
unused address.
4. Connect the Disk Drive to Your Computer.
a. Find the HP-IB cable provided with the disk drive.
6-72
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9125S/9127A Flexible Disk Drives
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket on the back of
the disk drive. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect your HP 9125/27 cable to one of the other devices on
the interface.
5. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the “AC LINE” socket on the
back of the disk drive, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
6. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 0 (or the alternate address you set in an earlier
step of this installation procedure) has been used and is no longer available
on the interface you selected. Use the “Address Record” form on the
Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-73
HP 9125S/9127A Flexible Disk Drives
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 9125S/27A Flexible Disk Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your disk
drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the interface
you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 6-24.
HP 9125S/27A Flexible Disk Drive
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Device
Name
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor
HP 9125S/27A
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n00
2
HP 9125S/27A
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n00
2
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for
the next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and
use the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g.,
/dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the
address was set to 2, and so on.
6-74
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9125S/9127A Flexible Disk Drives
Table 6-25.
HP 9125S/27A Flexible Disk Drive
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
Device
Name
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor
HP 9125S/27A
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n00
2
HP 9125S/27A
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n00
2
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for
the next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and
use the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g.,
/dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the
address was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-75
HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
Description and Support
The HP 9133D/H/L contains a Winchester (hard) disk drive and a 3 1/2 -inch
double-sided flexible disk drive. The HP 9134D/H/L contains a Winchester
(hard) disk drive only.
HP 9133D/H/L, 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
6-76
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev. A or later
Adding Mass Storage Devices
Installation Procedure
HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 9133D/H/L and HP
9134D/H/L to your Series 300 computer. Before you do this, however, refer to
the manual(s) that came with the drive to:
■
Unpack the drive.
■
Check the voltage switch setting.
■
Check the fuse value.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and disk drive off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Select one of the following interfaces, listed in order of preference for optimum
disk performance:
■ HP 98625 Disk Interface
■ Built-in HP-IB Interface or HP 98624A HP-IB Interface
3. Set the Address.
a. On the back of the disk drive, find the HP-IB address wheel, labeled
“ADDRESS.”
b. Set the HP-IB address:
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive (besides this HP 9133/34)
already connected to the interface, set the “ADDRESS” wheel to 2,
unless address 2 has already been used.
■ If there are two other disk or tape drives (besides this HP 9133/34)
already connected to the interface, set the “ADDRESS” wheel on your
HP 9133/34 to 3, unless address 3 has already been used. If it has,
choose any unused address.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-77
HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
4. Set the Configuration Switch.
SKIP?
The configuration switch partitions the disk into multiple
volumes, making the disk act like several smaller disk drives.
The switch is preset for a single volume. If you want multiple
volumes on your disk, continue with this step. If you are
satisfied with one volume (as is usually the case with HP-UX),
skip to the next numbered step.
a. Find the configuration switch, labeled “CONFIGURATION,” on the
back of the disk drive.
b. Refer to the manual that came with your disk drive for a list of
configuration switch settings.
c. Decide how you would like your hard disk partitioned and set the
configuration switch accordingly. Make this decision carefully, for you
cannot change this setting without re-initializing the disk. Some factors
to consider:
■ If you will be storing primarily large files on your disk, partition your
disk into a few large volumes.
■ If you will be storing primarily small files on your disk, partition the
disk into several small volumes.
■ If you will store both large and small files on the disk, then create both
small and large volumes, or choose a good median volume size.
■ If you want to create different volume types on your disk, partition the
disk according to the storage requirements of each system or volume.
Caution
6-78
Files may be lost if you change the configuration switch after
initializing the disk. Only change the configuration switch
immediately before you initialize, or re-initialize, the disk.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
5. Connect the Disk Drive to Your Computer.
a. Find the HP-IB cable provided with the disk drive.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket on the back of
the disk drive. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect your HP 9133/34 cable to one of the other devices on
the interface.
6. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the back
of the disk drive, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
7. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 0 (or the alternate address you set in an earlier
step of this installation procedure) has been used and is no longer available
on the interface you selected. Use the “Address Record” form on the
Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-79
HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 9133/34 Disk Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your disk
drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the interface
you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
6-80
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
Table 6-26.
HP 9133/34 Disk Drive
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select code 14)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 1st vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n00
3
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 1st vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n00
3
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 2nd vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n01
3
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 2nd vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n01
3
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 3rd vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n02
3
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 3rd vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n02
3
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 4th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n03
3
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 4th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n03
3
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 5th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n04
3
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 5th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n04
3
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 6th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n05
3
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 6th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n05
3
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 7th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n06
3
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 7th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n06
3
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 8th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n07
3
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 8th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n07
3
Device Name
Continued on next page ...
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-81
HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
HP 9133/34 Disk Drive
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
(Continued)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor
HP 9133 - Flexible
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n10
2
HP 9133 - Flexible
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n10
2
Device Name
NOTE: In this table, refer only to the entries for the number of volumes you
selected. If you have one volume (default configuration), only the “1st. vol.”
entry applies to your disk.
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for
the next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and
use the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g.,
/dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the
address was set to 2, and so on.
6-82
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
Table 6-27.
HP 9133/34 Disk Drive
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor***
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 1st vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n00
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 1st vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n00
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 2nd vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n01
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 2nd vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n01
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 3rd vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n02
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 3rd vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n02
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 4th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n03
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 4th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n03
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 5th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n04
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 5th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n04
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 6th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n05
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 6th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n05
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 7th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n06
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 7th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n06
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 8th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n07
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 8th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n07
7
Device Name
Continued on next page ...
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-83
HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
HP 9133/34 Disk Drive
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
(Continued)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor***
HP 9133 - Flexible
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n10
2
HP 9133 - Flexible
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n10
2
Device Name
NOTE: In this table, refer only to the entries for the number of volumes you
selected. If you have one volume (default configuration), only the “1st. vol.”
entry applies to your disk.
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for
the next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and
use the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g.,
/dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the
address was set to 2, and so on.
***
For an HP 98620B DMA Card, the recommended interleave factor for the
hard disk is 4 instead of 7.
6-84
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
Table 6-28.
HP 9133/34 Disk Drive
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor***
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 1st vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n00
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 1st vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n00
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 2nd vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n01
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 2nd vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n01
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 3rd vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n02
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 3rd vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n02
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 4th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n03
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 4th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n03
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 5th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n04
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 5th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n04
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 6th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n05
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 6th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n05
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 7th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n06
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 7th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n06
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 8th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n07
7
HP 9133/34 - Hard, 8th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n07
7
Device Name
Continued on next page ...
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-85
HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
HP 9133/34 Disk Drive
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
(Continued)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor***
HP 9133 - Flexible
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n10
2
HP 9133 - Flexible
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n10
2
Device Name
NOTE: In this table, refer only to the entries for the number of volumes you
selected. If you have one volume (default configuration), only the “1st. vol.”
entry applies to your disk.
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for
the next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and
use the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g.,
/dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the
address was set to 2, and so on.
***
For an HP 98620B DMA Card, the recommended interleave factor for the
hard disk is 4 instead of 7.
6-86
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9144A Tape Drive
Description and Support
The HP 9144A Tape Drive uses 1/4 -inch tape cartridges. Two formatted
storage capacities are available using the 88140SC (16.7 megabyte) or the
88140LC (67.0 megabyte) cartridges. The tape drive provides read-after-write
capability for data verification as well as data recovery and auto-sparing, and
it is compatible with existing 1/4 -inch cartridges built into other HP mass
storage devices.
HP 9144A Tape Drive
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev. A or later
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-87
HP 9144A Tape Drive
Installation Procedure
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 9144A to your
Series 300 computer. Before you do this, however, refer to the manual(s) that
came with the tape drive to:
■ Unpack the drive.
■ Check the voltage select switch. And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and tape drive off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
a. HP-UX Recommendations:
■ If you selected an HP 98625 Disk Interface for your system disk(s), use
the built-in HP-IB Interface for your HP 9144A tape drive.
■ If you selected the built-in HP-IB interface for your system disk(s),
use an HP 98624A HP-IB Interface for your HP 9144A tape drive (if
available).
■ Otherwise, use your built-in HP-IB interface for both disk and tape
drives.
b. BASIC and Pascal Workstation Recommendations:
■ Connect the tape drive to either the HP 98625 Disk Interface or to the
built-in HP-IB interface.
3. Set the Address.
a. On the back of the tape drive, find the set of four switches labeled
“ADDRESS.”
b. Set the HP-IB address:
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive (besides this HP 9144A)
already connected to the interface, set the “ADDRESS” switches to 2
as shown in Figure 6-18, unless address 2 has already been used.
6-88
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9144A Tape Drive
Figure 6-18.
Address 2
■ If there are two other disk or tape drives (besides this HP 9144A)
already connected to the interface, set the “ADDRESS” switches to 3
as shown in Figure 6-19, unless address 3 has already been used. Refer
to the manual that came with your tape drive for additional switch
settings.
Figure 6-19.
Address 3
4. Connect the Tape Drive to Your Computer.
a. Find the HP-IB cable provided with the tape drive.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket on the back of
the tape drive. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-89
HP 9144A Tape Drive
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect your HP 9144A cable to one of the other devices on the
interface.
5. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the back
of the tape drive, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
6. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 0 (or the alternate address you set in an earlier
step of this installation procedure) has been used and is no longer available
on the interface you selected. Use the “Address Record” form on the
Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
6-90
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9144A Tape Drive
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 9144A Tape Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
tape drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the
interface you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 6-29.
HP 9144A Tape Drive
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor
HP 9144A
/dev/ct/#s0
b
0
0x070n00
1
HP 9144A
/dev/rct/#s0
c
4
0x070n00
1
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the tape drive. Replace # with any unique
number, and use the same number in both the /dev/ct and /dev/rct entries
(e.g., /dev/ct/1s0 and /dev/rct/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-91
HP 9144A Tape Drive
Table 6-30.
HP 9144A Tape Drive
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor
HP 9144A
/dev/ct/#s0
b
0
0x080n00
1
HP 9144A
/dev/rct/#s0
c
4
0x080n00
1
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the tape drive. Replace # with any unique
number, and use the same number in both the /dev/ct and /dev/rct entries
(e.g., /dev/ct/1s0 and /dev/rct/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
6-92
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9153A/9154A Disk Drives
Description and Support
The HP 9153A contains a Winchester (hard) disk drive and a 3 1/2 -inch
double-sided flexible disk drive. The HP 9154A contains a Winchester (hard)
disk drive only.
HP 9153A and 9154A Disk Drives
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev. A or later
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-93
HP 9153A/9154A Disk Drives
Installation Procedure
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 9153A and HP
9154A to your Series 200/300 computer. Before you do this, however, refer to
the manual(s) that came with the drive to:
■ Unpack the drive.
■ Check the voltage switch setting.
■ Check the fuse value.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and disk drive off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Select one of the following interfaces, listed in order of preference for
optimum disk performance:
■ HP 98625 Disk Interface
■ Built-in HP-IB Interface or HP 98624A HP-IB Interface
3. Set the Address.
a. On the back of the disk drive, find the HP-IB address wheel, labeled
“ADDRESS.”
b. Set the HP-IB address:
■ If this is the first (or only) disk or tape drive you intend to connect
to the interface, set the “ADDRESS” wheel to 0, unless address 0 has
already been used.
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive (besides this HP 9153/54)
already connected to the interface, set the “ADDRESS” wheel to 2,
unless address 2 has already been used.
■ If there are two other disk or tape drives (besides this HP 9153/54)
already connected to the interface, set the “ADDRESS” wheel to 3,
unless address 3 has already been used. If it has, choose any unused
address.
6-94
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9153A/9154A Disk Drives
4. Set the Configuration Switch.
SKIP?
The configuration switch partitions the disk into multiple
volumes, making the disk act like several smaller disk drives.
The switch is preset for a single volume. If you want multiple
volumes on your disk, continue with this step. If you are
satisfied with one volume (as is usually the case with HP-UX),
skip to the next numbered step.
a. Find the HP-IB Module in the lower-left corner of the back of the disk
drive (Note: the HP-IB module contains the HP-IB connector).
b. Remove the two screws holding the module in place.
c. Remove the HP-IB module by pulling the flange at the bottom straight
out of the disk drive.
d. Refer to the manual that came with your disk drive for a list of
configuration switch settings.
e. Decide how you would like your hard disk partitioned and set the
configuration switch accordingly. Make this decision carefully, for you
cannot change this setting without re-initializing the disk. Some factors
to consider:
■ If you will be storing primarily large files on your disk, partition your
disk into a few large volumes.
■ If you will be storing primarily small files on your disk, partition the
disk into several small volumes.
■ If you will store both large and small files on the disk, choose a good
median volume size.
■ If storing more than one system on your disk (e.g., BASIC and the
Pascal Workstation), or if you want to create different volume types on
your disk, partition the disk according to the storage requirements of
each system or volume.
f.
Replace the HP-IB module in your disk drive.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-95
HP 9153A/9154A Disk Drives
Caution
Files may be lost if you change the configuration switch after
initialing the disk. Only change the configuration switch
immediately before you initialize, or re-initialize, the disk.
5. Connect the Disk Drive to Your Computer.
a. Find the HP-IB cable provided with the disk drive.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket on the back of
the disk drive. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect your HP 9153/54 cable to one of the other devices on
the interface.
6. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the “AC line” socket on the
back of the disk drive, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
7. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 0 (or the alternate address you set in an earlier
step of this installation procedure) has been used and is no longer available
on the interface you selected. Use the “Address Record” form on the
Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
6-96
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9153A/9154A Disk Drives
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 9153/54 Disk Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your disk
drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the interface
you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-97
HP 9153A/9154A Disk Drives
Table 6-31.
HP 9153/54 Disk Drive
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 1st vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n00
1
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 1st vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n00
1
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 2nd vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n01
1
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 2nd vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n01
1
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 3rd vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n02
1
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 3rd vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n02
1
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 4th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n03
1
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 4th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n03
1
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 5th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n04
1
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 5th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n04
1
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 6th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n05
1
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 6th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n05
1
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 7th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n06
1
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 7th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n06
1
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 8th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n07
1
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 8th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n07
1
Device Name
Continued on next page ...
6-98
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9153A/9154A Disk Drives
HP 9153/54 Disk Drive
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
(Continued)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor
HP 9153 - Flexible
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n10
2
HP 9153 - Flexible
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n10
2
Device Name
NOTE: In this table, refer only to the entries for the number of volumes you
selected. If you have one volume (default configuration), only the “1st. vol.”
entry applies to your disk.
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for
the next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and
use the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g.,
/dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the
address was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-99
HP 9153A/9154A Disk Drives
Table 6-32.
HP 9153/54 Disk Drive
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor***
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 1st vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n00
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 1st vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n00
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 2nd vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n01
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 2nd vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n01
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 3rd vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n02
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 3rd vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n02
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 4th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n03
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 4th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n03
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 5th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n04
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 5th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n04
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 6th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n05
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 6th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n05
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 7th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n06
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 7th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n06
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 8th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n07
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 8th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n07
3
Device Name
Continued on next page ...
6-100
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9153A/9154A Disk Drives
HP 9153/54 Disk Drive
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
(Continued)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor***
HP 9153 - Flexible
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n10
2
HP 9153 - Flexible
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n10
2
Device Name
NOTE: In this table, refer only to the entries for the number of volumes you
selected. If you have one volume (default configuration), only the “1st. vol.”
entry applies to your disk.
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for
the next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and
use the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g.,
/dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the
address was set to 2, and so on.
***
For an HP 98620B DMA card, the interleave factor for the hard disk is 2
instead of 3.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-101
HP 9153A/9154A Disk Drives
Table 6-33.
HP 9153/54 Disk Drive
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor***
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 1st vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n00
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 1st vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n00
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 2nd vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n01
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 2nd vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n01
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 3rd vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n02
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 3rd vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n02
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 4th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n03
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 4th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n03
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 5th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n04
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 5th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n04
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 6th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n05
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 6th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n05
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 7th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n06
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 7th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n06
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 8th vol.
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n07
3
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 8th vol.
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n07
3
Device Name
Continued on next page ...
6-102
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 9153A/9154A Disk Drives
HP 9153/54 Disk Drive
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
(Continued)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor***
HP 9153 - Flexible
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x080n10
2
HP 9153 - Flexible
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x080n10
2
Device Name
NOTE: In this table, refer only to the entries for the number of volumes you
selected. If you have one volume (default configuration), only the “1st. vol.”
entry applies to your disk.
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root disk, 1 for
the next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and
use the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g.,
/dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the
address was set to 2, and so on.
***
For an HP 98620B DMA card, the interleave factor for the hard disk is 2
instead of 3.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-103
HP 7957/58/59B and 7961/62/63B Disk Drives
Description and Support
These disk drives are Command Set (CS/80) devices.
HP 7957/58/59/61/62/63B Disk Drives
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
6-104
on Release
with Model
6.0 or later
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev. A or later
Adding Mass Storage Devices
Installation Procedure
HP 7957/58/59B and 7961/62/63B Disk Drives
The following procedure describes how to connect your disk drive to your Series
300 computer. Before doing this however, refer to the manual(s) that came
with the drive to:
■ Unpack the drive.
■ Check the voltage selector switch.
■ Check the fuse value.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and disk drive off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Select one of the following interfaces, listed in order of preference for optimum
disk performance:
■ HP 98625 Disk Interface
■ Built-in HP-IB Interface
3. Set the Address.
a. On the back of the disk drive, find the address wheel labeled
“ADDRESS” in the upper left corner.
b. Set the HP-IB address:
Caution
Positions 8 and 9 on the ADDRESS wheel are for use by
service personnel only. If the drive is powered on with 8 or 9
selected, possible loss of data may occur.
■ If this is the first disk or tape drive you are installing on the interface,
set the address wheel to 0, unless address 0 has been used elsewhere.
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive (besides this disk drive)
already connected to the interface, set the address wheel to 2, unless
address 2 has been used elsewhere.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-105
HP 7957/58/59B and 7961/62/63B Disk Drives
■ If there are two other disk or tape drives (besides this disk drive)
already connected to the interface, set the address wheel to 3, unless
address 3 has been used elsewhere. If it has, choose any unused address.
4. Connect the Disk Drive to Your Computer.
a. Find the HP-IB cable provided with the disk drive.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket on the back of
the disk drive. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect the cable from your disk drive to one of the other
devices on the interface.
5. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the back of
the disk drive, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
6. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 0 (or the alternate address you set in an earlier step
of this installation procedure) has been used and is no longer available on
the interface you selected. Use the “Address Record” form on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
6-106
Adding Mass Storage Devices
Worksheet Entries
HP 7957/58/59B and 7961/62/63B Disk Drives
You have now installed your 7957/58/59B or 7961/62/63B Disk Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your disk
drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the interface
you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 6-34.
HP 7957/58/59B Disk Drive or
HP 7961/62/63B Disk Drive
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor
HP 7957/58/59B or
HP 7961/62/63B
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x0e0n00
1
HP 7957/58/59B or
HP 7961/62/63B
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x0e0n00
1
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root, 1 for
the next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and
use the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g.,
/dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 1 if the address was set to 1, use 4 if the address
was set to 4, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-107
HP 7957/58/59B and 7961/62/63B Disk Drives
Table 6-35.
HP 7957/58/59B Disk Drive or
HP 7961/62/63B Disk Drive
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor
HP 7957/58/59B or
HP 7961/62/63B
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
0
0x070n00
1
HP 7957/58/59B or
HP 7961/62/63B
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
4
0x070n00
1
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root, 1 for
the next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and
use the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g.,
/dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 1 if the address was set to 1, use 4 if the address
was set to 4, and so on.
6-108
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7957/58/59S SCSI Disk Drives
Description and Support
These disk drives are Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) devices.
HP 7957/58/59S SCSI Disk Drives
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
6.0 or later
all Series 300 with boot
ROM Rev. C or later
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-109
HP 7957/58/59S Disk Drives
Installation Procedure
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 7957/58/59S to
your Series 300 computer. Before you do this however, refer to the manual(s)
that came with the drive to:
■ Unpack the drive.
■ Check the voltage selector switch. And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and disk drive off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
The HP 7957/58/59S disk drives are supported only on an HP 98265A SCSI
Interface.
3. Set the Address.
a. On the back of the disk drive, find the address switches labeled
“ADDRESS” in the upper left corner.
b. Set the address to any unused address from 0 to 6 (the SCSI interface is
set to 7).
4. Connect the Disk Drive to Your Computer.
a. Attach the cable coming from the SCSI interface to one of the two
connectors on the disk drive (it does not matter which one). Press fully
in.
b. Place the terminator (supplied with the SCSI interface card) fully on the
other connector on the back of the disk drive.
c. If you have more than one disk drive on the SCSI bus, the drives should
be daisy-chained, with the terminator on the last disk in the
chain.
5. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the back of
the disk drive, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
6-110
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7957/58/59S Disk Drives
6. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 0 (or the alternate address you set in an earlier
step of this installation procedure) has been used and is no longer available
on the interface you selected. Use the “Address Record” form on the
Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
NOTE!
Turn on the power to the disk drive BEFORE turning the
power on to the computer.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-111
HP 7957/58/59S Disk Drives
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your 7957/58/59S Disk Drive. Remember that the
terminator must be terminating the SCSI bus (step 4-b above).
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your disk
drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the interface
you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 6-36.
HP7957/58/59S SCSI Drive
Connected to HP 98265A Interface (Select Code 14)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
Interleave
Factor
HP 7957/58/59S
/dev/dsk/#s0
b
7
0x0e0n00
1
HP 7957/58/59S
/dev/rdsk/#s0
c
47
0x0e0n00
1
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the disk drive (e.g., 0 for the root, 1 for
the next disk installed, etc.). Replace # with any unique number, and
use the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk entries (e.g.,
/dev/dsk/1s0 and /dev/rdsk/1s0). Record the numbers on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 1 if the address was set to 1, use 4 if the address
was set to 4, and so on.
6-112
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
NOTE!
These tape drives are to be installed by an HP Customer
Engineer. The installation cost is included in the purchase
price of the unit.
Description and Support
The HP 7979A is a 125 ips 1/2 -inch 9-track open-reel tape drive supplied in
an upright cabinet. It supports 1600 cpi Phase Encoded (PE) format (can be
upgraded to 6250 cpi).
The HP 7980A is a 125 ips 1/2 -inch 9-track open-reel tape drive which
supports 1600 Phase Encoded (PE) format and 6250 Group Coded Recording
(GCR) format.
The HP 7980XC is the same as the 7980A, with the added feature of being able
to read and write in compressed format.
HP 7979/80A and 7980XC
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
6.2 or later
all Series 300
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-113
HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
Installation Procedure
Your HP Customer Engineer will unpack and install your tape drive for you. The
following procedure describes how to connect your tape drive to your Series 300
computer.
Caution
Do not attempt to operate the unit until your HP Customer
Engineer has installed the unit for you.
1. Play It Safe.
a. Make arrangements with your HP Customer Engineer to have your tape
drive installed.
b. Turn your computer off, if it is not already off.
c. Turn your Tape Drive on.
2. Select Your Interface.
a. Select one of the following interfaces, listed in order of preference for
optimum tape performance:
■ HP 98625 Disk Interface
■ Built-in HP-IB Interface
3. Set the Address.
a. Take the drive offline by pressing ONLINE. The Online indicator light
should turn off.
b. Press OPTION to enter the Option Mode. TEST * appears in the display.
c. Press NEXT until ADDR * appears.
d. Press ENTER to select the ADDRessing Option.
e. Using NEXT or PREV, display the address desired (OFF, or 0 to 7).
■ NOTE: The tape drive is shipped with the Address set to OFF. This
setting should only be used to remove the drive from the HP-IB.
6-114
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
■ If this is the first disk or tape drive your are connecting to the
interface, select address 0 unless it has already been used for some
other device.
■ If there is only one other disk or tape drive already connected to the
interface, enter address 2 unless it has already been used.
■ If there are two other disk or tape drives already connected to the
interface, use address 3 unless it has already been used. If it has,
choose any unused address.
f.
Press the ENTER button to assign the new address. The address you
selected appears as SET<#>. The # will be the HP-IB address (or OFF).
This display will last for one second and then return to the ADDR *
display.
g. Exit the Option Mode by pressing OPTION or RESET.
4. Connect the Tape Drive to Your Computer.
a. Find the HP-IB cable provided with the tape drive.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB socket on the back of
the tape drive. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect your tape drive cable to one of the other devices on the
interface.
5. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 0 (or the alternate address you set in an earlier
step of this installation procedure) has been used and is no longer available
on the interface you selected. Use the “Address Record” form on the
Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-115
HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 7979A, 7980A or 7980XC Tape Drive.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
tape drive with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the disk
and interface you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you will be ready to install your next peripheral. If you
have installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
6-116
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
Table 6-37.
HP 7979/80A Tape Drive
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, Berkeley, no
rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n83
HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, Berkeley,
autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n82
HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, AT&T, no
rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n81
HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, AT&T,
autorewind
/dev/rmt/#sO
c
9
0x0e0n80
HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley, no
rewind
/dev/rmt/#sO
c
9
0x0e0n43
HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley,
autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n42
HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, AT&T, no
rewind
/dev/rmt/#sO
c
9
0x0e0n41
HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, AT&T,
autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0n40
Device Name
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-117
HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
Table 6-38.
HP 7979/80A Tape Drive
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, Berkeley, no
rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n83
HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, Berkeley,
autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n82
HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, AT&T, no
rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n81
HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, AT&T,
autorewind
/dev/rmt/#sO
c
9
0x070n80
HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley, no
rewind
/dev/rmt/#sO
c
9
0x070n43
HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley,
autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n42
HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, AT&T, no
rewind
/dev/rmt/#sO
c
9
0x070n41
HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, AT&T,
autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070n40
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the magnetic tape drive. Replace # with any
unique number (e.g., /dev/rmt/0s0 for the first mag tape). Record the
numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
6-118
Adding Mass Storage Devices
HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
Table 6-39.
HP 7980XC Tape Drive
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
HP 7980XC, 6250 cpi, Berkeley, no
rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0nc3
HP 7980XC, 6250 cpi, Berkeley,
autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0nc2
HP 7980XC, 6250 cpi, AT&T, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x0e0nc1
HP 7980XC, 6250 cpi, AT&T, autorewind /dev/rmt/#sO
c
9
0x0e0nc0
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the magnetic tape drive. Replace # with any
unique number (e.g., /dev/rmt/0s0 for the first mag tape). Record the
numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
Adding Mass Storage Devices
6-119
HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
Table 6-40.
HP 7980XC Tape Drive
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path
Name*
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
HP 7980XC, 6250 cpi, Berkeley, no
rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070nc3
HP 7980XC, 6250 cpi, Berkeley,
autorewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070nc2
HP 7980XC, 6250 cpi, AT&T, no rewind
/dev/rmt/#s0
c
9
0x070nc1
HP 7980XC, 6250 cpi, AT&T, autorewind /dev/rmt/#sO
c
9
0x070nc0
Device Name
*
# is a number that identifies the magnetic tape drive. Replace # with any
unique number (e.g., /dev/rmt/0s0 for the first mag tape). Record the
numbers on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 0 if the address was set to 0, use 2 if the address
was set to 2, and so on.
6-120
Adding Mass Storage Devices
Contents
7. Adding Printers
HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer . . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 2227A/B QuietJet Plus and 2228A QuietJet Printers
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
Spooled Printing . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 2563B, 2564B and 2566B Printers . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 2684 LaserJet 2000 Printer . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
Spooled Printing . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 2686A/D LaserJet HP 33440A LaserJet-II HP 33447A
LaserJet-IID Printer . . . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
Spooled Printing . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 2932A and 2934A Printers . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 3630A PaintJet Printer . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-6
7-8
7-8
7-9
7-12
7-12
7-15
7-15
7-16
7-18
7-20
7-20
7-21
7-23
7-23
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-26
7-26
7-27
7-29
7-29
7-33
7-33
7-34
7-38
7-40
Contents-1
Description and Support
Installation Procedure .
. .
Worksheet Entries
Spooled Printing . .
Contents-2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-40
7-41
7-43
7-43
7
Adding Printers
■ HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer
■ HP 2227A/B QuietJet Plus and 2228A
QuietJet Printers
■ HP 2563B, 2564B and 2566B Printers
■ HP 2684 LaserJet 2000 Printer
■ HP 2686A/D LaserJet, 33440A
LaserJet-II, and 33447A LaserJet-IID
Printers
■ HP 2932A and HP 2934A Printers
■ HP 3630A PaintJet Printer
Are You Adding Any of the Above Printers?
NO
Proceed to Chapter 8, “Graphics Devices”.
YES
Refer to the table of contents on the previous page to
find where your installation instructions begin.
Adding Printers
7-1
HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer
Description and Support
The HP 2225A ThinkJet printer connects to the computer through the HP-IB
interface.
HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
7-2
Adding Printers
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Installation Procedure
HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 2225A ThinkJet
printer to your Series 200/300 computer. Before you do this, however, refer to
the manual(s) that came with your printer to:
■ Unpack the printer.
■ Check the line voltage.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and printer off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Use either the built-in HP-IB interface or an HP 98624A HP-IB Interface.
If using HP-UX, avoid placing the ThinkJet on the same interface used by
your disk or tape drives, if possible.
3. Set the Address.
SKIP?
If this is the first (or only) printer you are connecting to the
interface, you can skip to step 4. The address is preset to 1 and
need not be changed—unless you have changed the address of
some other device on the interface to 1.
a. Find the set of switches to the left of the HP-IB connector. Switches A1
through A5 in this group determine the address.
b. Set the address switches to 4 as shown in Figure 7-1, unless address 4 has
been used elsewhere. Refer to the manual that came with the printer if
you need additional switch settings.
Adding Printers
7-3
HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer
Figure 7-1.
Address 4
4. Connect the Printer to the Computer.
a. Get an HP-IB cable.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB connector on the back
of the printer. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect the printer’s cable to one of the other devices on the
interface.
5. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the back
of the printer, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
6. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 1 (or the alternate address you chose in step 3)
has been used and is no longer available on the interface you selected. Use
the “Address Record” form on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this
purpose.
And finally ...
Refer to your printer’s manual(s) to:
■ Load the print head cartridge.
7-4
Adding Printers
HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer
■ Load the paper.
■ Perform the printer’s self-test.
Adding Printers
7-5
HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
printer with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the select
code you’ll be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 7-1.
HP 2225A ThinkJet
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
HP 2225A ThinkJet
/dev/lp2225
c
7
0x070n00
HP 2225A ThinkJet
/dev/rlp2225
c
21
0x070n00
Device Name
*
7-6
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 1 if the address was set to 1, use 4 if the
address was set to 4, and so on.
Adding Printers
HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer
Table 7-2.
HP 2225A ThinkJet
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
HP 2225A ThinkJet
/dev/lp2225
c
7
0x080n00
HP 2225A ThinkJet
/dev/rlp2225
c
21
0x080n00
Device Name
*
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 1 if the address was set to 1, use 4 if the
address was set to 4, and so on.
Adding Printers
7-7
HP 2227A/B QuietJet Plus
and 2228A QuietJet Printers
Description and Support
The HP 2227A QuietJet Plus and 2228A QuietJet printers both connect to the
computer through an RS-232C interface. The HP 2227B QuietJet Plus printer
connects to the computer though an HP-IB interface.
HP 2227A/B QuietJet Plus and 2228A QuietJet Printers
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
7-8
Adding Printers
on Release
with Model
5.1 or later
all Series 300
Installation Procedure
HP 2227A/B QuietJet Plus
and 2228A QuietJet Printers
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 2227A/B QuietJet
Plus or 2228A QuietJet printer to your Series 300 computer. Before you do
this, however, refer to the manual(s) that came with your printer to:
■ Unpack the printer.
■ Connect the Power Module 1.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and printer off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
a.
If you have an HP 2227A or 2228A printer: use only an RS-232C
interface. Use any one of the following RS-232C interfaces:
■ The built-in RS-232 interface in a Series 300 computer.
■ HP 98626A RS-232C Interface.
■ HP 98628A Datacomm Interface.
■ HP 98644A RS-232C Serial Interface.
b. If you have an HP 2227B printer: use either the built-in HP-IB interface
or an HP 98624A HP-IB interface. Avoid placing the printer on the same
interface used by your disk or tape drives, if possible.
3. Set the Address.
SKIP?
Skip to step 4 if your printer is an HP 2227A or 2228A
(RS-232C interface).
For the HP 2227B printer (HP-IB interface), if this is the first
(or only) printer you are connecting to the interface, skip to
step 4. The address should be preset to 1 and shouldn’t need
to be changed - unless you have changed the address of some
other device on the interface to 1.
a. Find the two banks of switches located inside the front cover.
Adding Printers
7-9
HP 2227A/B QuietJet Plus
and 2228A QuietJet Printers
b. Refer to the manual that came with the printer to set the address to one
that is currently unused.
c. Record the address on the “Address Record” form on the Chapter 6,
“Mass Storage” tab.
4. Connect Printer to Computer
a. If you have an HP 2227A or 2228A printer (RS-232C interface):
i.
Select your cable(s). Following are some of the possible cabling
combinations you an use. Combinations other than those listed may
also work.
■ Series 300 Built-in Interface: connect an HP 40242G to the printer
if an HP 98561-61604 cable is connected to the interface; or connect
an HP 40242G cable directly between the printer and the interface.
■ HP 98626A Interface: connect an HP 17255D cable to the printer
if an HP 5061-4215 DTE cable is connected to the interface; or
connect an HP 40242M cable to the printer if an HP 5061-4216
DCE cable is connected to the interface.
■ HP 98628A Interface: connect an HP 17255D cable to the printer
if an HP 5061-4215 DTE cable is connected to the interface; or
connect an HP 40242M cable to the printer if an HP 5061-4216
DCE cable is connected to the interface.
■ HP 98644A Interface: connect an HP 40242G cable
directly between the printer and the interface.
ii. Connect one (male) end of the printer’s cable to the connector on the
printer. Lock the connection in place with the screws.
iii. If your interface connection requires one or more
additional cables, connect the remaining cable(s) to the interface.
b. If you have an HP 2227B printer HP-IB (interface):
i.
Get an HP-IB cable.
ii. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB connector on
the back of the printer. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the
connection.
7-10
Adding Printers
HP 2227A/B QuietJet Plus
and 2228A QuietJet Printers
iii. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect the printer’s cable to one of the other devices on the
interface.
c. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the back
of the printer, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
And finally ...
Refer to your printer manual(s) to:
■ Prime and install the print cartridge.
■ Load and adjust paper.
■ Run the printer’s self-test.
Adding Printers
7-11
HP 2227A/B QuietJet Plus
and 2228A QuietJet Printers
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 2227A, 2227B or 2228A printer.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
printer with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Spooled Printing
For spooled printing, use the 2686a spooler model file. For unspooled printing,
insert the following shell commands into /etc/rc:
nohup sleep 2000000000 < /dev/lp2686 &
stty -parenb -ienqak cs8 9600 -cstopb -clocal ixon opost onlcr tab3 <
/dev/lp2686
To configure the interface for raster graphics printing, execute the following
stty command (or equivalent ioctl(2) calls). Reissue the sequence above after
printing raster data.
stty -parenb -ienqak cs8 9600 -cstopb -clocal ixon -opost < /dev/lp2686
Table 7-3.
HP 2227A/28A
Connected to Series 300 Built-in Interface
Device Name
HP 2227A/28A, select code 9
7-12
Adding Printers
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
No.
Minor
No.
/dev/lp2227a
c
1
0x090004
HP 2227A/B QuietJet Plus
and 2228A QuietJet Printers
Table 7-4.
HP 2227A/28A
Connected to HP 98626A, 98628A or 98644A Interface
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
No.
Minor
No.
HP 2227A/28A, select code 9
/dev/lp2227a
c
1
0x090004
HP 2227A/28A, select code 10
/dev/lp2227a
c
1
0x0a0004
HP 2227A/28A, select code 15
/dev/lp2227a
c
1
0x0f0004
HP 2227A/28A, select code 16
/dev/lp2227a
c
1
0x100004
HP 2227A/28A, select code 17
/dev/lp2227a
c
1
0x110004
HP 2227A/28A, select code 19
/dev/lp2227a
c
1
0x130004
HP 2227A/28A, select code 20
/dev/lp2227a
c
1
0x140004
Device Name
Table 7-5.
HP 2227B
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
HP 2227B QuietJet Plus
/dev/lp2227b
c
7
0x070n00
HP 2227B QuietJet Plus
/dev/rlp2227b
c
21
0x070n00
Device Name
*
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 1 if the address was set to 1, use 4 if the
address was set to 4, and so on.
Adding Printers
7-13
HP 2227A/B QuietJet Plus
and 2228A QuietJet Printers
Table 7-6.
HP 2227B
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
HP 2227B QuietJet Plus
/dev/lp2227b
c
7
0x080n00
HP 2227B QuietJet Plus
/dev/rlp2227b
c
21
0x080n00
Device Name
*
7-14
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 1 if the address was set to 1, use 4 if the
address was set to 4, and so on.
Adding Printers
HP 2563B, 2564B and 2566B Printers
Description and Support
The HP 2563B, 2564B and 2566B are dot-matrix impact printers. They
connect to an HP-IB interface, and include installation by an HP Customer
Engineer.
HP 2563B, 2564B and 2566B Printers
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Printers
7-15
HP 2563B, 2564B and 2566B Printers
Installation Procedure
The HP 2563B, 2564B and 2566B printers are installed by an HP Customer
Engineer. Make arrangements for installation with your nearest HP Sales and
Service office.
The following procedure describes how to connect the HP 2563B, 2564B or
2566B printer to your Series 300 computer. Before you do this, however, refer
to the manual(s) that came with your printer to:
■ Load the ribbon cartridge.
■ Load and adjust paper.
■ Set the printer configuration.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
a. Contact your HP Customer Engineer to have your printer installed.
Installation is included in the price of the printer.
b. Turn your computer and printer off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
a. If you have an Option 200 (non-CIPER) Printer: Use either the built-in
HP-IB interface or an HP 98624A HP-IB Interface. If using HP-UX,
avoid placing the printer on the same interface used by your disk or tape
drives, if possible.
b. If you have an Option 850 (CIPER) Printer: Use either the built-in
HP-IB interface or an HP 98624A HP-IB Interface.
3. Connect the Printer to the Computer.
a. Find the HP-IB cable provided with the printer.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB connector on the back
of the printer. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
7-16
Adding Printers
HP 2563B, 2564B and 2566B Printers
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect the printer’s cable to one of the other devices on the
interface.
4. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the back of
the printer, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
5. Set the Address.
a. Turn your printer on.
b. Press the ON LINE key until the ON LINE indicator light turns off.
c. Press the CONFIG key and the FINE ADJ. keys simultaneously until the
number 20 appears in the display, then release them.
d. The current address will appear in the display. Set the address as follows:
■ If this is the first (or only) printer you are connecting to the interface,
press the FINE ADJ. key until the number 1 appears in the display,
unless address 1 has been used elsewhere.
■ If this is the second printer you are connecting to the interface, press
the FINE ADJ. key until the number 4 appears in the display, unless
address 4 has been used elsewhere. If it has, select any unused address.
e. Press the ENTER key to enter the new address and return the printer to
normal operation.
6. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 1 (or the alternate address you chose in step 5)
has been used and is no longer available on the interface you selected. Use
the “Address Record” form on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this
purpose.
Adding Printers
7-17
HP 2563B, 2564B and 2566B Printers
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 2563B, 2564B or 2566B Printer.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
printer with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the select
code you’ll be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 7-7.
HP 2563/64/66B
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 200
non-CIPER
/dev/lp2563
c
7
0x070n00
HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 200
non-CIPER
/dev/rlp2563
c
7
0x070n01
HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 850 CIPER
/dev/lp2563
c
26
0x070n00
HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 850 CIPER
/dev/rlp2563
c
26
0x070n01
Device Name
*
If you have an HP 2564B or HP 2566B, substitute 2564 or 2566 for 2563 in
the path name.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 5 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 1 if the address was set to 1, use 4 if the
address
was set to 4, and so on.
7-18
Adding Printers
HP 2563B, 2564B and 2566B Printers
Table 7-8.
HP 2563/64/66B
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 200
non-CIPER
/dev/lp2563
c
7
0x080n00
HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 200
non-CIPER
/dev/rlp2563
c
7
0x080n01
HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 850 CIPER
/dev/lp2563
c
26
0x080n00
HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 850 CIPER
/dev/rlp2563
c
26
0x080n01
Device Name
*
If you have an HP 2564B or HP 2566B, substitute 2564 or 2566 for 2563 in
the path name.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 5 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 1 if the address was set to 1, use 4 if the
address
was set to 4, and so on.
Adding Printers
7-19
HP 2684 LaserJet 2000 Printer
Note
Your authorized dealer or HP Service Representative will assist
in the initial set-up and configuration of your printer.
Description and Support
The HP 2684 connects to the computer via an RS-232/422 interface.
HP 2684 LaserJet 2000 Printer
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
7-20
Adding Printers
on Release
with Model
5.2 or later
all Series 300
Installation Procedure
HP 2684 LaserJet 2000 Printer
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 2684 printer to your
Series 300 computer. Before you do this, however, refer to the manual(s) that
came with your printer to:
■ Unpack the printer.
■ Assemble printer components.
■ Load toner.
■ Load paper.
■ Run a self test.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and printer off, if thew are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Use any one of the following RS-232C interfaces:
■ The built-in RS-232 interface in Series 300 computers.
■ HP 98626A RS-232C Interface
■ HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
■ HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
■ HP 98644A Asynchronous RS-232C Serial Interface
3. Set the Printer’s Switches.
Refer to the LaserJet 2000 Technical Reference Manual for the appropriate
configuration switch settings.
4. Connect the Printer to the Computer.
a. Using the following table as a guide, determine which cables you will
need.
Adding Printers
7-21
HP 2684 LaserJet 2000 Printer
Table 7-9. HP 2684 LaserJet 2000 Interface/Printer Cables
Interface
Cable
Interface
Host
Connection
Printer
Cable
Built-in (9 pins)
Built-in (25 pins)
92221M
92221M and 13232U
13242 or 92218A or 92222M
DTE (25M)
DCE (25M)
DTE (25M)
17255D
40242M
17255D
98626A (Opt. 001)
98626A (Opt. 002)
5061-4215
5061-4216
DTE (25M)
DCE (25F)
17255D
40242M
98628A (Opt. 001)
98628A (Opt. 002)
5061-4215
5061-4216
DTE (25M)
DCE (25F)
17255D
40242M
98642A (Port 0)
92219S or 92218A or 92222M
92219S and 13232U
DTE (25M)
DCE (25F)
17255D
40242M
98644A
13242N or 92218A or 92222M
13242N and 13232U
DTE (25M)
DCE (25F)
17255D
40242M
b. Connect one (male) end of the printer cable to the connector on the back
of the printer. Lock the connector in place with the screws.
c. Connect the interface cable to the interface.
d. Connect the printer cable to the interface cable.
5. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the back of
the printer, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
7-22
Adding Printers
HP 2684 LaserJet 2000 Printer
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 2684 Printer.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
printer with HP-UX. Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are
found at the end of Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here
when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Spooled Printing
For spooled printing, use the 2686a spooler model file. For unspooled printing,
insert the following shell commands into /etc/rc:
nohup sleep 2000000000 < /dev/lp2684 &
stty -parenb -ienqak cs8 9600 -cstopb -clocal ixon opost onlcr tab3 <
/dev/lp2684
To configure the interface for raster graphics printing, execute the following stty
command (or equivalent ioctl(2) calls). Reissue the sequence above after printing
raster data.
stty -parenb -ienqak cs8 9600 -cstopb -clocal ixon -opost < /dev/lp2684
Table 7-10.
HP 2684
Connected to Series 300 Built-in Interface
Device Name
HP 2684, select code 9
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
No.
Minor
No.
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x090004
Adding Printers
7-23
HP 2684 LaserJet 2000 Printer
Table 7-11.
HP 2684
Connected to HP 98626A, 98628A or 98644A Interface
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
HP 2684, select code 9
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x090004
HP 2684, select code 10
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x0a0004
HP 2684, select code 15
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x0f0004
HP 2684, select code 16
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x100004
HP 2684, select code 17
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x110004
HP 2684, select code 19
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x130004
HP 2684, select code 20
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x140004
HP 2684, select code 10, port 0
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x0a0004
HP 2684, select code 10, port 1
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x0a0104
HP 2684, select code 10, port 2
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x0a0204
HP 2684, select code 10, port 3
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x0a0304
HP 2684, select code 13, port 0
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x0d0004
HP 2684, select code 13, port 1
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x0d0104
HP 2684, select code 13, port 2
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x0d0204
HP 2684, select code 13, port 3
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x0d0304
Device Name
Continued on next page ...
7-24
Adding Printers
HP 2684 LaserJet 2000 Printer
HP 2684
Connected to HP 98626A, 98628A or 98644A Interface
(Continued)
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
HP 2684, select code 15, port 0
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x0f0004
HP 2684, select code 15, port 1
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x0f0104
HP 2684, select code 15, port 2
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x0f0204
HP 2684, select code 15, port 3
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x0f0304
HP 2684, select code 16, port 0
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x100004
HP 2684, select code 16, port 1
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x100104
HP 2684, select code 16, port 2
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x010204
HP 2684, select code 16, port 3
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x010304
HP 2684, select code 17, port 0
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x110004
HP 2684, select code 17, port 1
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x110104
HP 2684, select code 17, port 2
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x110204
HP 2684, select code 17, port 3
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x110304
HP 2684, select code 19, port 0
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x130004
HP 2684, select code 19, port 1
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x130104
HP 2684, select code 19, port 2
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x130204
HP 2684, select code 19, port 3
/dev/lp2684
c
1
0x130304
Device Name
Adding Printers
7-25
HP 2686A/D LaserJet
HP 33440A LaserJet-II
HP 33447A LaserJet-IID Printer
Description and Support
The HP 2686A/D LaserJet, HP 33440A LaserJet-II, and HP 33447A
LaserJet-IID printers connect to the computer via an RS-232C interface.
HP 2686A/D LaserJet,
HP 33440A LaserJet-II and HP 33447A LaserJet-IID Printer
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
7-26
for Product
on Release
with Model
2686A/D
33440A
5.0 or later
all Series 300
33447A
6.2 or later
all Series 300
Adding Printers
Installation Procedure
HP 2686A/D LaserJet
HP 33440A LaserJet-II
HP 33447A LaserJet-IID Printer
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 2686A/D LaserJet,
HP 33440A LaserJet-II, or HP 33447A LaserJet-IID printer to your Series 300
computer. Before you do this, however, refer to the manual(s) that came with
your printer to:
■ Unpack the printer.
■ Install the electrophotographic (EP) cartridge.
■ Install the fusing roller cleaning pad.
■ Install the paper trays.
■ Load the paper
■ Configure the printer.
And now, the installation procedure ...
Note
Configuration of this interface is not covered in this guide.
Refer to the computer’s installation manual to set the baud
rate switches to 9600 baud (switches 1, 2 and 3 to OPEN,
switch 4 to not-OPEN). Set the handshake type switches to
XON/XOFF (switch 1 to not-OPEN, switch 2 to OPEN). The
remaining switches are preset to the correct values for the HP
2686A/D; check them only if you have changed them.
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and printer off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Use any one of the following RS-232C interfaces:
■ The built-in RS-232 interface in a Series 300 computer
■ HP 98626A RS-232C Interface
■ HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
■ HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
■ HP 98644A RS-232C Serial Interface
Adding Printers
7-27
HP 2686A/D LaserJet
HP 33440A LaserJet-II
HP 33447A LaserJet-IID Printer
3. Select Your Cable(s).
Following are some of the possible cabling combinations you can use.
Combinations other than those listed may also work.
■ Series 300 Built-in Interface: connect an HP 17255D to the printer if an
HP 92221M or 13242N cable is connected to the interface; or connect an
HP 92221P cable directly between the printer and the interface (HP-UX
only).
■ HP 98626A or HP 98628A Interfaces: connect an HP 17255D cable to the
printer if an HP 5061-4215 DTE cable is connected to the interface; or
connect an HP 13242N or 92218A cable to the printer if an HP 5061-4216
DCE, 13232U or Modem~Modem cable is connected to the interface.
■ HP 98642A Interface: connect an HP 17255D cable to the printer if an
HP 92219S, 92218A, or 92222M cable is connected to the interface (port
0); or connect an HP 13242G or 92219R cable directly between the printer
and the interface (port 0); or connect an HP 92219U adaptor directly from
the interface (ports 1, 2 or 3) and the printer.
■ HP 98644A Interface: connect an HP 17255D cable to the printer if an
HP 13242N, 92218A or 92222M cable is connected to the interface; or
connect an HP 13242G or 92219R cable directly between the printer and
the interface.
4. Connect the Printer to the Computer.
a. Connect one (male) end of the printer’s cable to the connector on the
printer. Lock the connection in place with the screws.
b. If your interface connection requires one or more additional cables,
connect the remaining cable(s) to the interface.
c. Connect the other end of the printer’s cable either directly to the
interface or to cable(s) connected to the interface.
5. Connect the Power Cord.
a. Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the
back of the printer, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
7-28
Adding Printers
HP 2686A/D LaserJet
HP 33440A LaserJet-II
HP 33447A LaserJet-IID Printer
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 2686A/D or 33440A Printer.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
printer with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the interface
you’ll be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Spooled Printing
For spooled printing, use the 2686a spooler model file. For unspooled printing,
insert the following shell commands into /etc/rc:
nohup sleep 2000000000 < /dev/lp2686 &
stty -parenb -ienqak cs8 9600 -cstopb -clocal
/dev/lp2686
ixon opost onlcr tab3 <
To configure the interface for raster graphics printing, execute the following stty
command (or equivalent ioctl(2) calls). Reissue the sequence above
after printing raster data.
stty -parenb
-ienqak cs8 9600 -cstopb -clocal ixon -opost < /dev/lp2686
Table 7-12.
HP 2686A/D, 33440A or 33447A
Connected to Series 300 Built-in Interface
Device Name
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 9
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
No.
Minor
No.
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x090004
Adding Printers
7-29
HP 2686A/D LaserJet
HP 33440A LaserJet-II
HP 33447A LaserJet-IID Printer
Table 7-13.
HP 2686A/D or 33440A
Connected to HP 98626A, 98628A or 98644A Interface
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 9
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x090004
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 10
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x0a0004
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 15
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x0f0004
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 16
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x100004
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 17
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x110004
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 19
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x130004
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 20
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x140004
Device Name
7-30
Adding Printers
HP 2686A/D LaserJet
HP 33440A LaserJet-II
HP 33447A LaserJet-IID Printer
Table 7-14.
HP 2686A/D, 33440A or 33447A
Connected to HP 98642A Interface
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 10, port 0
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x0a0004
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 10, port 1
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x0a0104
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 10, port 2
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x0a0204
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 10, port 3
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x0a0304
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 13, port 0
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x0d0004
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 13, port 1
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x0d0104
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 13, port 2
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x0d0204
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 13, port 3
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x0d0304
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 15, port 0
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x0f0004
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 15, port 1
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x0f0104
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 15, port 2
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x0f0204
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 15, port 3
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x0f0304
Device Name
Continued on next page ...
Adding Printers
7-31
HP 2686A/D LaserJet
HP 33440A LaserJet-II
HP 33447A LaserJet-IID Printer
HP 2686A/D, 33440A or 33447A
Connected to HP 98642A Interface
(Continued)
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 16, port 0
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x100004
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 16, port 1
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x100104
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 16, port 2
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x010204
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 16, port 3
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x010304
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 17, port 0
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x110004
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 17, port 1
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x110104
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 17, port 2
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x110204
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 17, port 3
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x110304
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 19, port 0
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x130004
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 19, port 1
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x130104
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 19, port 2
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x130204
HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, select
code 19, port 3
/dev/lp2686
c
1
0x130304
Device Name
7-32
Adding Printers
HP 2932A and 2934A Printers
Description and Support
The HP 2930 Series of printers provide features for several levels of printer
categories. However, installation for all printers in the series is common.
HP 2932A and 2934A Printers
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Printers
7-33
HP 2932A and 9234A Printers
Installation Procedure
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 2932A or HP 2934A
printer to your Series 300 computer. Before you do this, however, refer to the
manual(s) that came with your printer to:
■ Unpack the printer.
■ Check the voltage setting.
■ Install the fuse.
■ Install the ribbon.
■ Adjust the print head gap.
■ Load the paper.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and printer off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Use either the built-in HP-IB interface or an HP 98624A HP-IB Interface.
3. Connect the Printer to the Computer.
a. Get an HP-IB cable.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB connector on the back
of the printer. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect the printer’s cable to one of the other devices on the
interface.
4. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the back
of the printer, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
5. Set the Address.
7-34
Adding Printers
HP 2932A and 9234A Printers
SKIP?
If this is the first (or only) printer you are connecting to the
interface, you can skip to step 6. The address is preset to 1 and
need not be changed—unless you have changed the address of
some other device on the interface to 1.
a. Turn the printer on. The power switch is in the back above the power
cord.
b. Press the SELECT button on the top of the printer, then press the
VIEW button. The printer will respond by printing its SETTINGS
options.
c. Press the right arrow button until the print head is under the MODIFY
INTERFACE option (i.e., under the word “INTERFACE” on the right
side of the paper.
d. Press the SELECT button. The printer will print the MODIFY
INTERFACE - HP-IB options.
e. Press the right arrow button until the print head is under the ADDRESS
option, then press the SELECT button.
f.
The printer will print a list of numbers. Press the right arrow button
until the print head is under the number 4 and press the SELECT
button, unless you have used address 4 elsewhere. If you have, choose
any unused address.
Note
If the printer asks you to select a FIRST DIGIT and a
SECOND DIGIT, position the print head under 0 for the
FIRST DIGIT and press the SELECT button, then position
the print head under 4 for the SECOND DIGIT and press the
SELECT button.
g. Press the VIEW button to exit SETTINGS mode.
Adding Printers
7-35
HP 2932A and 9234A Printers
6. Enable the AMIGO Protocol.
SKIP?
If there will be no other devices on the interface besides the HP
2932/34A printer, skip to step 7.
a. Turn the printer on, if it is not already on.
b. Press the SELECT button on the top of the printer, then press the
VIEW button. The printer will respond by printing its SETTINGS
options.
c. Press the right arrow button until the print head is under the MODIFY
INTERFACE option (i.e., under the word “INTERFACE” on the right
side of the paper.
d. Press the SELECT button. The printer will print the MODIFY
INTERFACE - HP-IB options.
e. The print head should be under the SECONDARY COMMANDS option
on the left side of the paper. If it isn’t, use the arrow buttons to position
the print head under that option.
f.
Press the SELECT button. The printer will print the SECONDARY
COMMANDS options.
g. Use the arrow buttons to position the print head under the “on” option
and press the SELECT button. This enables the AMIGO protocol, which
allows HP-UX to pace the printer (time-share the bus with other devices
on the interface) if the printer’s address is in the range 0 to 7.
h. Press the VIEW button to exit SETTINGS mode.
7. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 1 (or the alternate address you chose in step 5) has
been used and is no longer available on the interface you selected. Use the
“Address Record” form on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab for this purpose.
And finally ...
Refer to your printer’s manual(s) to:
7-36
Adding Printers
HP 2932A and 9234A Printers
■ Set print margins.
■ Run the printer’s self-test
Adding Printers
7-37
HP 2932A and 9234A Printers
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 2932/34A Printer.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
printer with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the select
code you’ll be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 7-15.
HP 2932/34A
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
HP 2932/34A
/dev/lp2932
c
7
0x070n00
HP 2932/34A
/dev/rlp2932
c
7
0x070n01
Device Name
*
If you have an HP 2934A, substitute 2934 for 2932 in the path name.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 5 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 1 if the address was set to 1, use 4 if the address
was set to 4, and so on.
7-38
Adding Printers
HP 2932A and 9234A Printers
Table 7-16.
HP 2932/34A
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
HP 2932/34A
/dev/lp2932
c
7
0x080n00
HP 2932/34A
/dev/rlp2932
c
7
0x080n01
Device Name
*
If you have an HP 2934A, substitute 2934 for 2932 in the path name.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 5 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 1 if the address was set to 1, use 4 if the address
was set to 4, and so on.
Adding Printers
7-39
HP 3630A PaintJet Printer
Description and Support
The HP 3630A PaintJet printer connects to a Series 300 computer through an
HP-IB interface.
HP 3630A PaintJet Printer
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
7-40
Adding Printers
on Release
with Model
5.5 or later
all Series 300
Installation Procedure
HP 3630A PaintJet Printer
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 3630A PaintJet
printer to your Series 300 computer. Before you do this, however, refer to the
manual(s) that came with your printer to:
■ Unpack the printer.
■ Install the help card.
■ Connect the power module.
■ Install the print cartridges.
■ Load paper
■ Run the self test.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and printer off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Use either the built-in HP-IB interface or an HP 98624A HP-IB interface. If
possible, avoid placing the PaintJet on the same interface used by your disk
or tape drives.
3. Set the Address.
SKIP?
If this is the first (or only) printer you are connecting to the
interface, you can skip to step 4. The address is preset to 1 and
need not be changed—unless you have changed the address of
some other device on the interface to 1.
a. Find the bank of switches to the left of the HP-IB connector on the rear
panel of the printer. The three right-most switches (labeled Al through
A3) in Figure 7-2) determine the address.
b. Set the address to 4 as shown in Figure 7-2, unless address 4 has been
used elsewhere. Refer to the manual that came with the printer if you
need additional switch settings.
Adding Printers
7-41
HP 3630A PaintJet Printer
Figure 7-2.
Address 4
4. Connect the Printer to the Computer.
a. Get an HP-IB cable (HP 10833A, B, C, or D).
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB connector on the back
of the printer. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
7-42
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect the printer’s cable to one of the other devices on the
interface.
Adding Printers
HP 3630A PaintJet Printer
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 3630A PaintJet Printer.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
printer with HP-UX. Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are
found at the end of Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here
when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Spooled Printing
For spooled printing, use the 2686a spooler model file. For unspooled printing,
insert the following shell commands into /etc/rc:
nohup sleep 2000000000 < /dev/lp2686 &
stty -parenb -ienqak cs8 9600 -cstopb -clocal ixon opost onlcr tab3 <
/dev/lp2686
To configure the interface for raster graphics printing, execute the following stty
command (or equivalent ioctl(2) calls). Reissue the sequence above after printing
raster data.
stty -parenb -ienqak cs8 9600 -cstopb -clocal ixon -opost < /dev/lp2686
Table 7-17.
HP 3630A PaintJet
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
HP 3630A PaintJet
/dev/lp3630
c
7
0x070n00
HP 3630A PaintJet
/dev/rlp3630
c
21
0x070n00
Device Name
*
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the
Installation Procedure). Replace n with a 1 if the address was set
to 1, use 4 if the address was set to 4, and so on.
Adding Printers
7-43
HP 3630A PaintJet Printer
Table 7-18.
HP 3630A PaintJet
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number**
HP 3630A PaintJet
/dev/lp3630
c
7
0x080n00
HP 3630A PaintJet
/dev/rlp3630
c
21
0x080n00
Device Name
*
7-44
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the
Installation Procedure). Replace n with a 1 if the address was set
to 1, use 4 if the address was set to 4, and so on.
Adding Printers
Contents
8. Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
HP Plotter (HP-IB Interface) . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 9111A Graphics Tablet . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
. .
HP 98700 Graphics Display Station
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 13279B Color Monitor . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 98720A Graphics Display Station . .
Description . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 98730A Graphics Display Station . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
Using DIO-I . . . . . . . . .
Using DIO-II . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-6
8-8
8-8
8-9
8-11
8-12
8-12
8-13
8-15
8-17
8-17
8-18
8-20
8-21
8-21
8-22
8-23
8-25
8-25
8-26
8-27
8-27
8-28
Contents-1
8
Adding Plotters & Other
Graphics Devices
■ HP 7440A Plotter (Option 002)
■ HP 7595A Plotter
■ HP 7470A Plotter (Option 002)
■ HP 7596A Plotter
■ HP 7475A Plotter (Option 002)
■ HP 9111A Graphics Tablet
■ HP 7550A Plotter
■ HP 98700 Graphics Display Station
■ HP 7570A Plotter (with 17570A)
■ HP 98720A Graphics Display Station
■ HP 7580B Plotter
■ HP 98730A Graphics Display Station
■ HP 7585B Plotter
■ HP 9872C/T Plotter
■ HP 7586B Plotter
■ HP 13279B Color Monitor
Are You Adding Any of the Above Plotters?
YES
Proceed to the next page.
Are You Adding Any of the Above Other Graphics Devices?
YES
Refer to the table of contents on the previous page to
find where your installation instructions begin.
NO
Proceed to Chapter 9, “Terminals”.
See also:
Graphics Printers
Graphics Terminals/Monitors
HP-HIL Graphics Devices
Chapter 7, “Printers”
Chapter 9, “Terminals”
Chapter 10, “Miscellaneous”
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
8-1
HP Plotter (HP-IB Interface)
Description and Support
All HP plotters connect to your computer’s HP-IB interface in the same
fashion.
HP Plotters
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
8-2
for Product
on Release
with Model
HP 7440A (Option 002)
HP 7470A (Option 002)
HP 7475A (Option 002)
HP 7550A
HP 7580B
HP 7585B
HP 7586B
HP 9872C/T
5.0 or later
all Series 300
HP 7570A (with 17570A)
5.1 or later
all Series 300
HP 7595A
HP 7596A
5.2 or later
all Series 300
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
HP Plotter (HP-IB Interface)
Installation Procedure
The following procedure describes how to connect your plotter to your Series
300 computer. Before you do this, however, refer to the manual(s) that came
with your printer to:
■ Unpack the plotter.
■ Check the line voltage.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and plotter off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Use either the built-in HP-IB interface or an HP 98624A HP-IB Interface. If
using HP-UX, avoid placing the plotter on the same interface used by your
disk or tape drives, if possible. A dedicated HP 98624A HP-IB Interface is
recommended.
3. Set the Address.
SKIP?
If this is the first (or only) plotter you are connecting to the
interface, you can skip to step 4. The address is preset to 5 and
need not be changed—unless you have changed the address of
some other device on the interface to 5.
a. Find the set of five HP-IB address switches near the HP-IB connector.
b. Set the address switches to 7 as shown in Figure 8-1, unless address 7 has
been used elsewhere. Refer to the manual that came with the plotter if
you need additional switch settings.
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
8-3
HP Plotter (HP-IB Interface)
Figure 8-1.
Address 7
4. Connect the Plotter to the Computer.
a. Get an HP-IB cable.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB connector on the back
of the plotter. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect the plotter’s cable to one of the other devices on the
interface.
5. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end (the small end if using an HP 7440A) of the power
cord to the power socket on the back of the plotter, and connect the other
end to your power outlet.
6. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 5 (or the alternate address you chose in step 3)
has been used and is no longer available on the interface you selected. Use
the “Address Record” form on the Step 6 tab for this purpose.
And finally ...
Refer to your plotter’s manual(s) to:
■ Load the pens.
8-4
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
HP Plotter (HP-IB Interface)
■ Load the paper or medium.
■ Perform the Confidence Test.
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
8-5
HP Plotter (HP-IB Interface)
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your plotter.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
plotter with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the select
code you will be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 8-1.
Plotter
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Device Name
Plotter
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
/dev/plt7440
c
21
0x070n00
*
If you have a plotter other than the HP 7440A, substitute the model number of
your plotter for 7440 in the path name.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 5 if the address was set to 5, use 7 if the address
was set to 7, and so on.
8-6
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
HP Plotter (HP-IB Interface)
Table 8-2.
Plotter
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
Device Name
Plotter
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor**
Number
/dev/plt7440
c
21
0x080n00
*
If you have a plotter other than the HP 7440A, substitute the model number of
your plotter for 7440 in the path name.
**
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 5 if the address was set to 5, use 7 if the address
was set to 7, and so on.
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
8-7
HP 9111A Graphics Tablet
Description and Support
The HP 9111A Graphics Tablet connects to your computer’s HP-IB interface.
HP 9111A Graphics Tablet
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
8-8
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
HP 9111A Graphics Tablet
Installation Procedure
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 9111A Graphics
Tablet to your Series 300 computer. Before you do this, however, refer to the
manual(s) that came with your graphics table to:
■ Unpack the graphics tablet.
■ Check the line voltage setting.
■ Check the fuse.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and graphics tablet off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Use either the built-in HP-IB interface or an HP 98624A HP-IB Interface. If
using HP-UX, avoid placing the plotter on the same interface used by your
disk or tape drives, if possible. An HP-IB interface dedicated to the HP
9111A is strongly recommended.
3. Set the Address.
SKIP?
If this is the first (or only) HP 9111A you are connecting to the
interface, you can skip to step 4. The address is preset to 6 and
need not be changed—unless you have changed the address of
some other device on the interface to 6.
a. Find the set of six switches near the HP-IB connector. The right-hand
five switches in this group determine the graphics tablet’s address.
b. Set the address switches to 7 as shown in Figure 8-2, unless address 7 has
been used elsewhere. Refer to the manual that came with the graphics
tablet if you need additional switch settings.
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
8-9
HP 9111A Graphics Tablet
Figure 8-2.
Address 7
4. Connect the HP 9111A to the Computer.
a. Get an HP-IB cable.
b. Connect one end of the HP-IB cable to the HP-IB connector on the
back of the graphics tablet. Tighten the thumb screws to secure the
connection.
c. Connect the other end of the HP-IB cable to the interface.
Note
If the interface already has several cables connected to it,
connect the plotter’s cable to one of the other devices on the
interface.
5. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the back
of the graphics tablet, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
6. Record the Address.
Make a note that address 6 (or the alternate address you chose in step 3)
has been used and is no longer available on the interface you selected. You
can use the “Address Record” form on the Chapter 6, “Mass Storage” tab
for this purpose.
8-10
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
HP 9111A Graphics Tablet
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 9111A Graphics Tablet.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
plotter with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entries for the select
code you’ll be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 8-3.
HP9111A
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)
Device Name
HP 9111A
*
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
/dev/dig9111
c
21
0x070n00
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 6 if the address was set to 6, use 7 if the address
was set to 7, and so on.
Table 8-4.
HP9111A
Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface (Select Code 8)
Device Name
HP 9111A
*
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
/dev/dig9111
c
21
0x080n00
n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation
Procedure). Replace n with a 6 if the address was set to 6, use 7 if the address
was set to 7, and so on.
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
8-11
HP 98700 Graphics Display Station
Description and Support
The HP 98700 Graphics Display Station connects to the HP 98287A Graphics
Display Station Interface. The following procedure describes how to install the
HP 98700 Display Controller, the HP 98782A Color Monitor, and the optional
HP 98710A Graphics Accelerator upgrade system. Installation of the HP
46081A Speaker Module is described in Chapter 10, “Miscellaneous”.
HP 98700 Graphics Display Station
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
8-12
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
Installation Procedure
HP 98700 Graphics Display Station
1. Turn your computer off and remove the power cord.
2. If you have the HP 98710A Graphics Accelerator, follow these steps to
connect it:
a. Turn off the HP 98100A and remove the power cord.
b. Remove the cover plate on the front bottom of the HP 98700 and place it
in the parking position provided (see Figure 8-3).
Figure 8-3.
Removing the Cover Plate
c. Move the locking mechanism on top of the HP 98710A to the rear.
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
8-13
HP 98700 Graphics Display Station
d. Set the HP 98700 on top of the HP 98710A, making sure the guide pins
enter the guide pin sockets.
e. Gently but firmly press the HP 98700 down until the connector engages
and seats (see Figure 8-4).
Figure 8-4.
Connecting the HP 98700 to the HP 98710A
f.
Slide the locking mechanism forward to lock the two together.
3. Place the HP 98700/98710 between the computer and the monitor.
4. Connect the RGB cables to the monitor, observing the color coding of the
cables: red to red, blue to blue and green to green.
5. Connect the other end of the cables to the HP 98700 in the same manner.
6. Connect the interconnect cable to the HP 98287A Graphics Display Station
Interface. The cable connector key projects outward near the top from each
end of the connector shell. Ensure that this is UP when connecting to the
interface or the HP 98700.
8-14
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
HP 98700 Graphics Display Station
7. Connect the other end of the cable to the HP 98700.
8. Make sure all power switches in the system are off, and connect all power
cords.
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your Graphics Display Station.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
Graphics Display Station with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the
entries for the addressing mode you’ll be using.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 8-5.
98700 Graphics Display Station
Set to External Addressing Mode
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
HP 98700, select code 23
/dev/graphics
c
12
0x170200
HP 98700, select code 24
/dev/graphics
c
12
0x180200
HP 98700, select code 25
/dev/graphics
c
12
0x190200
HP 98700, select code 26
/dev/graphics
c
12
0x1a0200
HP 98700, select code 30
/dev/graphics
c
12
0x1e0200
Device Name
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
8-15
HP 98700 Graphics Display Station
Table 8-6.
98700 Graphics Display Station
Set to Internal Addressing Mode*
Device Name
Path Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
HP 98700, no S300 video
/dev/graphics
c
12
0x000000
HP 98700, with S300 video
/dev/graphics
c
12
0x000100
*
8-16
Separate entries are provided for systems with an enabled Series 300 built-in
video interface (“with S300 video”) and for systems without one (“no S300
video”). Choose the entry appropriate for your system.
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
HP 13279B Color Monitor
Description and Support
The HP 13279B Color Monitor connects to the HP 98627A Interface.
NOTE!
This monitor is to be installed by an HP Customer Engineer.
Installation and adjustment is included in the price of the monitor.
HP 13279B Color Monitor
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
8-17
HP 13279B Color Monitor
Installation Procedure
1. Play It Safe.
a. Contact your HP Sales and Service Office to arrange for installation of
your monitor. Installation and adjustment are included in the price of
the unit.
b. Turn your computer off and remove the power cord.
2. Connect the Cables.
a. Connect one cable from the RED video output on the HP 98627A
Interface to the CHANNEL A RED IN connector (J1) at the rear of the
monitor (see Figure 8-5).
b. Connect one cable from the GREEN video output on the HP 98627A
Interface to the CHANNEL A GREEN IN connector (J3) at the rear of
the monitor (see Figure 8-5).
c. Connect one cable from the BLUE video output on the HP 98627A
Interface to the CHANNEL A BLUE IN connector (J5) at the rear of the
monitor (see Figure 8-5).
Figure 8-5. HP 13279B Cable Connections.
3. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the back of
the monitor, and connect the other end to your power outlet.
8-18
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
HP 13279B Color Monitor
4. Adjust the Scan Rate.
Have your HP Customer Engineer adjust the scan rate.
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
8-19
HP 13279B Color Monitor
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your 13279B Color Monitor.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
monitor with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 8-7.
HP 13279B Color Monitor
Device Name
HP 13279B, select code 28
*
8-20
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
/dev/graphics
c
12
0x1c0200
If you changed the select code of the HP 98627A Color Output Interface, write
in the new select code (in hexadecimal) instead of 1c in the minor number.
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
HP 98720A Graphics Display Station
Description
The HP 98720A Graphics Display Station connects to the HP 98724A, 98725A
Local Graphics Bus Interface, or built in Model 319 interface, depending on
which Series 300 model computer you are using. The following procedure
describes how to install the HP 98720A Display Controller and the HP 98784A
Color Monitor.
Caution
Electronic assemblies in the HP 98720A such as the HP
98721A, 98722A, and the 98723A are very susceptible to
handling damage. They are installed by HP qualified personnel.
Damage caused by users may not be covered under warranty.
HP 98720A Graphics Display Station
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
using Interface
5.18 or later
319
built-in
5.18 or later
320
HP 98724A
5.18 or later
330
350
HP 98725A
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
8-21
HP 98720A Graphics Display Station
Installation Procedure
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 98720A to your
Series 300 computer. Before you do this, unpack the display station and check
the voltage setting according to the documentation for the station.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
a. Ensure all system power switches are OFF.
b. Remove system power cords from the power outlets.
2. Make sure that the correct interface is installed in your computer.
Installation of the HP 98724A and 98725A interface cards is covered in Step
5.
■ If you have a Model 320 computer, you should have an HP 98724A Local
Graphics Bus (LGB) interface card.
■ If you have a Model 330 or 350 computer, you need an HP 98725A Local
Graphics Bus (LGB) interface card.
3. Locate the Graphics Display Station near the computer and the monitor.
4. Connect the RGB cable to the monitor: red to red, green to green, and blue
to blue connectors.
5. Connect the other end of the RGB cable to the HP 98720A in the same
manner.
6. Connect the LGB cable to the HP 98724A/25A LGB interface connector.
The cable connector key projects outward near the top from each end of the
connector shell. Ensure that this is UP when connecting it to the interface
or the HP 98720A.
7. Connect the other end of the LGB cable to the HP 98720A.
8. After assuring that the power switches are in the OFF position, connect all
power cords. If your HP 98720A contains two power supplies, connect both
power cords.
8-22
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
HP 98720A Graphics Display Station
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 98720A Graphics Display Station.
Refer to the Starbase Graphics Techniques HP-UX Concepts and Tutorials
manual for further details. The following “Worksheet Entries” contain
information needed to use your HP 98720A with HP-UX.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 8-8.
HP 98720A
Set to Internal Addressing Mode
Device Name
Path Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
HP 98720A, image planes
/dev/crt
c
12
0x000000
HP 98720A, overlay planes
/dev/ocrt
c
12
0x000001
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
8-23
HP 98720A Graphics Display Station
Table 8-9.
HP 98720A
Set to External Addressing Mode (Select Code 26-27, 28-29,
30-31)
Device Name
Path Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
HP 98720A, select code 26-27, image
planes
/dev/crt
c
12
0x1a0200
HP 98720A, select code 26-27,
overlay planes
/dev/ocrt
c
12
0x1a0201
HP 98720A, select code 28-29, image
planes
/dev/crt
c
12
0x1c0200
HP 98720A, select code 28-29,
overlay planes
/dev/ocrt
c
12
0x1c0201
HP 98720A, select code 30-31, image
planes
/dev/crt
c
12
0x1e0200
HP 98720A, select code 30-31,
overlay planes
/dev/ocrt
c
12
0x1e0201
8-24
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
HP 98730A Graphics Display Station
Description and Support
The HP 98730A Graphics Display Station connects to the HP 98726A Local
Graphics Bus Interface. The following procedure describes how to install the
HP 98730A Display Controller.
HP 98730A Graphics Display Station
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
6.2 or later
330
350
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
8-25
HP 98730A Graphics Display Station
Installation Procedure
The following procedure describes how to connect your HP 98730A to your Series
300 computer. Before you do this however, refer to the manual(s) that came with
the 98730A to:
■ Unpack the HP 98730A.
■ Check the voltage setting.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
a. Ensure all system power switches are OFF.
b. Remove system power cords from the power outlets.
2. Make sure that the HP 98726A interface is installed in your computer.
Installation of this interface card is covered in Step 5.
3. Locate the Graphics Display Station near the computer and the monitor.
4. After assuring that the power switches are in the OFF position, connect all
power cords. If your HP 98730A contains two power supplies, connect both
power cords.
5. Connect the LGB cable to the HP 98726A LGB interface connector. The
cable connector key projects outward near the top from each end of the
connector shell. Ensure that this is UP when connecting it to the interface
or the HP 98730A.
6. Connect the other end of the LGB cable to the HP 98730A.
7. Connect the RGB cable to the monitor: red to red, green to green, and blue
to blue connectors.
8. Connect the other end of the RGB cable to the HP 98730A in the same
manner.
8-26
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
HP 98730A Graphics Display Station
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 98730A Graphics Display Station.
Refer to the Starbase Graphics Techniques HP-UX Concepts and Tutorials
manual for further details.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your HP
98730A with HP-UX.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Using DIO-I
This is the default setting on the 98726A interface card. The setting in
Table 8-10 requires the jumper JP1 to be in the $200000 position on the
interface card. This is the recommended choice for the HP 98726A / HP
98730A subsystem used as a console.
Table 8-10.
HP 98730A
Set to Internal Addressing Mode
Switch Setting
MSB ... LSB
CTL_BASE
(hex)
Select
Code
Path Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
01010110
$560000
internal
/dev/display
c
12
0x000000
The settings in Table 8-11 require the jumper JP1 to be in the $800000 position
on the interface card.
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
8-27
HP 98730A Graphics Display Station
Table 8-11.
HP 98730A
Set to External Addressing Mode (Select Code 10-11, 12-13,
14-15)*
Switch Setting
MSB ... LSB
CTL_BASE
(hex)
Select
Code
Path Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
01101010
$6A0000
10-11
/dev/display
c
12
0x100200
01101100
$6C0000
12-13
/dev/display
c
12
0x120200
01101110
$6E0000
14-15
/dev/display
c
12
0x140200
*
Additional settings can be found by referring to the tables listed in the
Installation Note for this interface card.
Using DIO-II
The jumper JP1 is ignored when using DIO-II space.
Table 8-12. HP 98730A DIO-II Settings*
Switch Setting
MSB ... LSB
CTL_BASE
(hex)
Select
Code
Path Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
10000101
$01400000
133
/dev/display
c
12
0x850200
10001001
$02400000
137
/dev/display
c
12
0x890200
10001101
$03400000
141
/dev/display
c
12
0x8d0200
*
8-28
Additional settings can be found by referring to the tables listed in the
Installation Note for this interface card.
Adding Plotters & Other Graphics Devices
Contents
9. Adding Terminals and Displays
HP Terminals . . . . . .
Description and Support .
Installation Procedure . .
. . .
Worksheet Entries
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-3
9-3
9-4
9-12
Contents-1
9
Adding Terminals and Displays
■ HP 13279B Color Monitor
■ HP 98700 Graphics Display Station (with HP 98782A Color Monitor)
■ HP 98720 Graphics Display Station (with HP 98784A Color Monitor)
Are You Adding Any of the Above Terminals or Displays?
NO
Proceed to the next page.
YES
These are considered graphics devices. Go back to
Chapter 8, “Graphics Devices”.
Adding Terminals and Displays
9-1
■ HP 2392A, 2393A and 2397A Terminals
■ HP 2623A, 2624B, 2625A, 2626A, 2627A, 2628A Terminals
■ HP 45610A/B HP Touchscreen PC (HP 150)
■ HP 45850A/B HP Touchscreen-II PC (HP 150-11)
■ HP 45710 HP The Portable PC (HP 110)
■ HP 45711 HP The Portable Plus PC (HP 110-Plus)
■ HP 9807A Integral PC (HP 9807)
Are You Adding Any of the Above as Terminals?
9-2
NO
Proceed to Chapter 10, “Miscellaneous”.
YES
Turn to the next page, where your installation
instructions begin.
Adding Terminals and Displays
HP Terminals
Description and Support
This section describes the installation of all HP 2390-series and 2620-series
terminals, as well as the HP Touchscreen, Portable and Integral PCs when used
as a terminal.
HP Terminals connect to any supported Series 300 RS-232C interface. The
HP 98628A Datacomm or the HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interfaces
are required for graphics terminals, unless their graphics capability will not be
used.
HP Terminals
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
with Product
on Release
with Model
2392A
2393A
2397A
HP Portable
HP Portable Plus
Integral PC
HP Touchscreen
HP Touchscreen-II
5.0 or later
all 300 Series
2623A
2624B
2626A
2627A
not supported
not supported
Adding Terminals and Displays
9-3
HP Terminals
Installation Procedure
The following procedure describes how to connect your terminal to your Series
300 computer. Before you do this, however, refer to the manual(s) that came
with your terminal to:
■ Unpack the terminal.
■ Connect the keyboard, if applicable.
■ Check the voltage.
■ Connect the power cable.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and terminal off, if they are not already off.
2. Select Your Interface.
Choose any of the following RS-232C Interfaces to connect your terminal:
Note
The HP 98642A or HP 98628A is recommended if you use an
application that sends data faster than 2400 baud (average).
Such applications include graphics from graphics terminals,
softkeys, and reading terminal status.
■ Built-in RS-232C interface of a Series 300 computer
■ HP 98626A RS-232C Interface
■ HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
■ HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
■ HP 98644A RS-232C Serial Interface
9-4
Adding Terminals and Displays
HP Terminals
3. Select Your Cable(s).
Note
Following are some of the possible cabling combinations you
can use. Combinations other than those listed may also work.
■ If you are using the Series 300 built-in RS-232C interface, and are
connecting an ...
◻ ... HP 2392A Terminal—connect an HP 40242M cable to
the terminal’s port 1 connector if you have an HP 13232U or
Modem~Modem cable leading from the interface; connect an HP
40242C cable to the terminal’s port 1 connector if you have an HP
92221P cable leading from the interface.
■ If you are using an HP 98628A Datacomm Interface, and are connecting
an ...
◻ ... HP 2392A, 2393 A or 2397A Terminal—connect an HP 40242M
cable to the terminal’s port 1 connector if you have an HP 5061-4216
(Option 2 DCE), 13232U, or Modem~Modem cable leading from the
interface.
◻ ... HP Touchscreen, Touchscreen-II, 2624B (using port 2), or
2626A (using port 2)—connect an HP 13242N or 92218A cable to
the terminal if you have an HP 5061-4216 (Option 2 DCE), 13232U,
or Modem~Modem cable leading from the interface; connect an HP
13242G or 92219R cable to the terminal if you have an HP 5061-4216
(Option 2 DCE) cable leading directly from the interface.
◻ ... HP Portable or Portable Plus PC—connect an HP 92221M cable to
the Portable if you have an HP 5061-4216 (Option 2 DCE), 13232U, or
Modem~Modem cable leading from the interface.
◻ ... HP Integral PC—connect an HP 82974A cable to the
Integral if you have an HP 5061-4216 (Option 2 DCE), 13232U, or
Modem~Modem cable leading from the interface.
Adding Terminals and Displays
9-5
HP Terminals
■ If you are using an HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface, port 0,
and are connecting an ...
◻ ... HP 2392A, 2393A or 2391A Terminal—connect an HP 40242M
cable to the terminal’s port 1 connector if you have an HP 13232U or
Modem~Modem cable leading from port 0 of the interface; connect an
HP 40242C cable to the terminal’s port 1 connector if you have an HP
13242G or 92219R cable leading from port 0 of the interface; connect
an HP 40242G cable directly between port 0 of the interface and port 1
of the terminal.
◻ ... HP Touchscreen, Touchscreen-II—connect an HP 13242N,
92222M, or 92218A cable to the terminal if you have an HP 13232U or
Modem~Modem cable leading from port 0 of the interface; connect an
HP 13242G or 92219R cable directly between port 0 of the interface
and the terminal.
◻ ... HP Portable or Portable Plus PC—connect an HP 92221M cable
to the Portable if you have an HP 13232U or Modem~Modem cable
leading from port 0 of the interface.
◻ ... HP Integral PC—connect an HP 82974A cable to the Integral if
you have an HP 13232U or Modem~Modem cable leading from port 0
of the interface.
■ If using an HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface, port 1, 2 or 3,
and you are connecting an ...
◻ ... HP 2392A, 2393A or 2391A Terminal—connect an HP 40242C
cable between the terminal’s port 1 connector and the interface’s port
1, 2 or 3 adaptor connector (HP 92219U).
◻ ... HP Touchscreen, Touchscreen-II—connect the port 1, 2 or 3
adaptor connector (HP 92219U) directly between the interface and the
terminal.
■ If using an HP 98644A RS-232C Serial Interface, and you are connecting
an ...
◻ ... HP 2392A Terminal—connect an HP 40242M cable to
the terminal’s port 1 connector if you have an HP 13232U or
Modem~Modem cable leading from the interface; connect an HP
9-6
Adding Terminals and Displays
HP Terminals
40242C cable to the terminal’s port 1 connector if you have an HP
92221P cable leading from the interface.
4. Connect the Terminal to the Computer.
a. Connect one end of the terminal’s cable to the connector on the back of
the terminal. Lock the connector in place using the screws or clips.
b. If your interface connection requires one or more additional cables,
connect the remaining cable(s) to the interface.
c. Connect the other end of the terminal’s cable either directly to the
interface or to cable(s) connected to the interface.
5. Configure the Terminal and Datacomm Port.
Refer to your terminal’s manual for instructions on configuring your
terminal and datacomm port to match the characteristics given in Table 9-1.
Not all of the characteristics listed in the table will apply to your terminal.
Adding Terminals and Displays
9-7
HP Terminals
Table 9-1.
Recommended terminal characteristics.
Characteristic
Setting
Comments
Suggested
Alternate Set
Line(B)
ASCII 8 Bits
No
YES required for NLS support
Asterisk
Off
Suggested
AUTO LF
Off
Required
Auto Terminator
No
Suggested
Baud Rate
9600
HP-UX Std.
Bell
On
Suggested
BLOCK MODE
Off
Required
Block Terminator
RS
Suggested
200ms
Suggested
BufSiz
128
Suggested
Caps Lock
Off
May change after login
Break Time
Carrier Detect
Open
Suggested
Check Parity
No
Required
Cabling may require
Circuit Assurance
Closed
Clear Terminator
No
Suggested
Clock
INT
Required
CPU Break
Open
Suggested
CS(CB)Xmit
No
Cursor Type
Line
Continued on next page ...
9-8
Adding Terminals and Displays
Cabling may require
Your choice
Recommended terminal characteristics,
(continued)
Characteristic
Setting
Data Bits
8
Data Speed Select
Datacomm
Handshake
DISPLAY
FUNCTIONS
Display Off After
Comments
Required for NLS support
Open
Suggested
XonXoff
Required
Off
Suggested
15 min.
Your choice
DM(CC)Xmit
No
Cabling may require
EnqAck
No
EnqAck not supported
Esc Xfer
Yes
Suggested
Closed
Suggested
US
Suggested
Fast Binary Read
Field Separator
GraphCompat
HP Terminals
Your choice
Inh DC2
Yes
Required
InhDcTest
Yes
Suggested
InhEolWrp
No (Closed)
Required
InhHndShk
Yes
Required
InhSkfTst
No
Suggested
Closed
Suggested
Insert & delete
sense
Inverse Background
Your choice
Keyboard
Should match your keyboard
LINE MODIFY
Off
Suggested
Continued on next page ...
Adding Terminals and Displays
9-9
HP Terminals
Recommended terminal characteristics,
(continued)
Characteristic
Setting
Comments
Line/Page
Line
Required
Local Echo
Off
Suggested
Closed
Main Channel
Should have no effect
MEMORY LOCK
Off
Suggested
MODIFY ALL
Off
Suggested
None (Open)
Parity
Terminal
Power On
Required for NLS support
Suggested
Printer Code 4
Your choice
Printer Nulls
Your choice
RecvPace
XonXoff (Open)
Required
Remote/Serial Dev
PORT1/PORT2
If using terminal’s port 1
PORT2/PORT1
If using terminal’s port 2
On
Required
512x390
Required
RETURN Def
CR
Required
RETURN=ENTER
No
Required
RR(CF)Recv
No
Cabling may require
Remote
Resolution
Strongly suggested
SPOW
No (Closed)
SR(CH)
Lo
Modem use may require
SRRInvert
No
Cabling may require
Continued on next page ...
9-10
Adding Terminals and Displays
Recommended terminal characteristics,
(continued)
Characteristic
SRRXmit
Setting
No
HP Terminals
Comments
Cabling may require
Start Column
1
Suggested
Stop Bits
1
HP-UX std.
XonXoff
Suggested
StripNulDel
No
Suggested
Tab=Spaces
No
Required
Terminal Id
2622A
Suggested for 2392A
2623A
Required for DGL on HP150 and 2393A
STOP Function
Terminal Mode
Transmit
Transmit indicator
TR(CD)
HP
Required by default terminfo
All Fields
Suggested
Closed
Suggested
Hi
XmitFnctn
No (Closed)
XmitPace
XonXoff
Modem use may require
vi changes as needed
Suggested
Adding Terminals and Displays
9-11
HP Terminals
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP Terminal.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
terminal with the HP-UX operating system. Refer to the entry for the interface
you connected your terminal to.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 9-2.
If You Connected the Terminal to
a Series 300 Built-in Interface (Select Code 9)...
Device Name
Terminal
*
9-12
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
number
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x090004
The path name given here assumes this is the second terminal you are
connecting (i.e., tty02). If this is not the case, change the path name
accordingly (e.g., /dev/tty03 for the third terminal, etc.).
Adding Terminals and Displays
HP Terminals
Table 9-3.
If You Connected the Terminal to an HP 98626A, 98628A
or 98644A Interface (Select Code 9, 10, 15, 16, 17, 19 or 20)...
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
number
Terminal on select code 9
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x090004
Terminal on select code 10
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0a0004
Terminal on select code 15
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0f0004
Terminal on select code 16
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x100004
Terminal on select code 17
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x110004
Terminal on select code 19
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x130004
Terminal on select code 20
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x140004
Device Name
*
The path name given here assumes this is the second terminal you are
connecting (i.e., tty02). If this is not the case, change the path name
accordingly (e.g., /dev/tty03 for the third terminal, etc.).
Adding Terminals and Displays
9-13
HP Terminals
Table 9-4.
If You Connected the Terminal to an HP 98642A Interface
(Select Code 10, 13, 15, 16, 17 or 19)...
Device Name
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
Terminal, select code 10, port 0
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0a0004
Terminal, select code 10, port 1
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0a0104
Terminal, select code 10, port 2
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0a0204
Terminal, select code 10, port 3
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0a0304
Terminal, select code 13, port 0
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0d0004
Terminal, select code 13, port 1
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0d0104
Terminal, select code 13, port 2
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0d0204
Terminal, select code 13, port 3
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0d0304
Terminal, select code 15, port 0
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0f0004
Terminal, select code 15, port 1
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0f0104
Terminal, select code 15, port 2
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0f0204
Terminal, select code 15, port 3
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0f0304
Terminal, select code 16, port 0
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x100004
Terminal, select code 16, port 1
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x100104
Terminal, select code 16, port 2
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x010204
Terminal, select code 16, port 3
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x010304
Continued on next page ...
*
9-14
The path name given here assumes this is the second terminal you are
connecting (i.e., tty02). If this is not the case, change the path name
accordingly (e.g., /dev/tty03 for the third terminal, etc.).
Adding Terminals and Displays
If You Connected the Terminal to an HP 98642A Interface
(Select Code 10, 13, 15, 16, 17 or 19)...
(Continued)
Device Name
HP Terminals
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
Terminal, select code 17, port 0
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x110004
Terminal, select code 17, port 1
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x110104
Terminal, select code 17, port 2
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x110204
Terminal, select code 17, port 3
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x110304
Terminal, select code 19, port 0
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x130004
Terminal, select code 19, port 1
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x130104
Terminal, select code 19, port 2
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x130204
Terminal, select code 19, port 3
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x130304
*
The path name given here assumes this is the second terminal you are
connecting (i.e., tty02). If this is not the case, change the path name
accordingly (e.g., /dev/tty03 for the third terminal, etc.).
Adding Terminals and Displays
9-15
Contents
10. Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 35723A HP Touch Bezel . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
. .
HP 37212A 300/1200 Baud Modem
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 45911A Graphics Tablet . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46020/21 Keyboards . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46060A/B Mouse . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46080A Extension Module . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46081A Speaker Module . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46082A/B Remote Extension Modules
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10-2
10-2
10-3
10-9
10-10
10-10
10-11
10-13
10-16
10-16
10-17
10-18
10-19
10-19
10-20
10-21
10-22
10-22
10-23
10-24
10-25
10-25
10-26
10-27
10-28
10-28
10-29
10-31
10-32
Contents-1
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46083A Rotary Control Knob . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46084A ID Module . . . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46085A Control Dials Module . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
. . . . . . . .
HP 46086A Button Box
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46087/88A Digitizers and HP 46089A Cursor
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 46094A Quadrature Port . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem 1200 . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
HP 92916A Bar Code Reader . . . . . . .
Description and Support . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Entries
Contents-2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10-32
10-33
10-35
10-36
10-36
10-37
10-38
10-39
10-39
10-40
10-41
10-42
10-42
10-43
10-44
10-46
10-46
10-47
10-48
10-49
10-49
10-50
10-51
10-52
10-52
10-53
10-55
10-56
10-56
10-57
10-59
10-62
10-62
10-63
10-65
10
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
■ HP 35723A HP Touch Bezel
■ HP 46084A ID Module
■ HP 37212A 300/1200 Baud Modem
■ HP 46085A Control Dials Module
■ HP 45911A Graphics Tablet
■ HP 46086A Button Box
■ HP 46020/21 Keyboards
■ HP 46087/88A Digitizers & 46089A
Cursor
■ HP 46060A/B Mouse
■ HP 46080A Extension Module
■ HP 46081A Speaker Module
■ HP 46082A/B Remote Extension
Modules
■ HP 46094A Quadrature Port
■ HP 92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem
1200
■ HP 92916A Bar Code Reader
■ HP 46083A Rotary Control Knob
Are You Adding Any of the Above Miscellaneous Peripherals?
NO
You have finished your installation.
YES
Refer to the table of contents on the previous page to
find where your installation instructions begin.
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-1
HP 35723A HP Touch Bezel
Description and Support
The HP 35723A is a user-installable bezel which adds touchscreen capability to
the HP 35731 and 35741 12-inch video monitors. It connects to your computer
via the HP-HIL interface.
HP 35723A HP Touch Bezel
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
10-2
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 35723A HP Touch Bezel
Installation Procedure
Note
Connecting and disconnecting HP-HIL devices while some
language/operating systems or application programs are
running may lead to unpredictable results. When possible,
connect all needed HP-HIL devices to your computer before
booting a language/operating system or running an application
program.
1. Turn your computer and monitor off.
2. Tilt your monitor screen up as far as it goes. Grasp the inner plastic frame by
the lower corners, then pull it up and toward you in one even motion (Figure
10-1).
Figure 10-1.
Removing CRT bezel
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-3
HP 35723A HP Touch Bezel
3. Locate the connector socket on your monitor (on the right at the bottom of
the display tube). If there is a plug in the socket, remove it (Figure 10-2).
Figure 10-2.
Locating socket on monitor
4. Place HP Touch flat on the table in front of the monitor so that the plug
on the end of the HP Touch ribbon cable lines up with the socket on your
monitor (Figure 10-3).
10-4
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 35723A HP Touch Bezel
Figure 10-3.
Aligning HP Touch plug with monitor socket
5. Connect the HP Touch cable plug to the socket on the monitor. Make sure
the cable is not twisted. The plug clicks into the socket when the connection
is properly made (Figure 10-4).
Figure 10-4.
Connecting plug to monitor socket
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-5
HP 35723A HP Touch Bezel
6. Hold HP Touch in front of the monitor. Tilt the top of HP Touch toward
the monitor. Line up the upper edge of HP Touch’s side mounting tabs so
that they slip under the retainer clips on the monitor (Figure 10-5).
Figure 10-5.
Aligning HP Touch with monitor
10-6
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 35723A HP Touch Bezel
7. Placing your thumbs under the lower corners of HP Touch, push up and
toward the monitor until HP Touch snaps firmly into place. Make sure
that the cable does not protrude from HP Touch. If it does protrude, pull
out the bottom edge of HP Touch, push the cable under and snap HP
Touch back into place (Figure 10-6).
Figure 10-6.
Attaching HP Touch
8. Find the HP-HIL cable that you purchased for the monitor. A separate
HP-HIL cable is required to connect the monitor to your HP-HIL interface.
9. Find the end of the cable that is marked with one black dot.
10. Find the HP-HIL connector on the back of the monitor that is marked with
one dot (the inner-most HP-HIL connector).
11. Plug the “one-dot” end of the cable into the “one-dot” connector on the
monitor.
12. Connect the other, “two-dot” end of the cable into the HP-HIL connector
on your computer (marked “KYBD” or “KEYBOARD”), or to the “two-dot”
connector of the last HP-HIL device you installed (e.g. keyboard).
13. Keep these constraints in mind:
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-7
HP 35723A HP Touch Bezel
■ You cannot have more than 7 HP-HIL addressable devices connected
to your computer at one time. The HP 46080A, 46081A, 46082A and
46082B Extension modules and the HP 46089A Four-Button Cursor
do not count as addressable devices, and the HP 46085A Control Dials
Module counts as three addressable devices. All other devices count as
one addressable device.
■ The current requirements of all of your devices must not exceed 750
milliamps (mA). To make sure you do not exceed this requirement, total
up the typical power required by each of your HP-HIL devices as given in
the following “Worksheet Entries” sections. If the total exceeds 750 mA,
you must remove one or more devices.
10-8
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 35723A HP Touch Bezel
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 35723A HP Touch Bezel.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your HP
Touch bezel with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Note
HP-HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP-HIL
interface without affecting the HP-UX operating system.
However, if you are running an application which requires the
use of a particular device and you remove the device from the
link, open the link to the device, or open the link to add a new
device, your application might not recognize the change and
may not work as expected.
Table 10-1.
HP 35723A HP Touch Bezel
Worksheet Entries
Device Name
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
Power
Req.
HP 35723A
/dev/r8042
c
23
0x000000
133 mA
HP 35723A
/dev/touch
c
24
0x000020
133 mA
*
The second minor number in the table assumes the digitizer is the second device
on the HP-HIL interface (address=2). If this is not the case, substitute the
correct position (address) of the digitizer in place of the 2 in the minor number
(e.g., if the digitizer is the third device on the interface, the minor number would
be 0x000030).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-9
HP 37212A 300/1200 Baud Modem
Description and Support
The HP 37212A 300/1200 Baud Modem connects to your computer via an
RS-232C interface.
HP 37212A 300/1200 Baud Modem
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
10-10
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
Installation Procedure
HP 37212A 300/1200 Baud Modem
The following procedure describes how to connect the modem to your
computer. Before you do this, however, refer to the manual that came with the
modem to:
■ Unpack the modem.
■ Contact the telephone company.
■ Check the voltage setting and fuse.
■ Mount the modem in a rack (if applicable). And now, the installation
procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and modem off, if they are not already off.
2. Set the Internal Switches.
The modem contains eight internal switches which set various operating
characteristics of the modem. The switches are all set to the OPEN position
and should not be changed, at least not initially. If you later decide that
you want to change these switches, refer to the instructions in the manual
that came with the modem.
Warning
Be sure to disconnect the power cord from the modem
whenever you are working with the internal switches and
jumpers. Lethal voltages are exposed when the top cover
is removed while the power cord is connected.
3. Connect the Telephone Cable.
a. Plug one end of the modular telephone cable into the “TELCO”
connector on the back of the modem.
b. Insert the remaining end of the telephone cable into a telephone wall
jack.
c. If you want to connect a telephone to the modem, plug the telephone’s
cable into the “PHONE” connector on the back of the modem.
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-11
HP 37212A 300/1200 Baud Modem
4. Select Your Interface and Cable.
The modem can be connected to any of the following RS-232C interfaces:
■ Series 200 Model 216 or 217 built-in “Data Communications” interface—
use an HP 5061-4215 DTE cable.
■ Series 300 built-in RS-232C interface—use an HP 13242N or 92221M
cable.
■ HP 98626A RS-232C Interface—use an HP 5061-4215 (Option 001 DTE)
cable.
■ HP 98628A Datacomm Interface—use an HP 5061-4215 (Option 001
DTE) cable.
■ HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface, port 0 (HP-UX only)—
use an HP 92219S, 92218A or 92222M cable. Ports 1, 2 and 3 are not
recommended for use with the modem.
■ HP 98644A RS-232C Serial Interface—use an HP 13242N, 92218A or
92222M cable.
5. Connect the Modem to Your Computer.
Connect the cable between the modem and the interface.
6. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the power cord into the power connector on the back of the
modem, and plug the other end into your power outlet.
7. Set the Front Panel Buttons.
a. Turn the modem on.
b. Locate the set of four buttons labeled HS, ALB, RDL, and DATA on the
front of the modem.
c. Set these buttons as follows:
■ Push the HS button in.
■ Leave the ALB, RDL and DATA buttons out.
10-12
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 37212A 300/1200 Baud Modem
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 37212A 300/1200 Baud Modem.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
modem with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 10-2.
If You Connected the Modem to
a Series 300 Built-in Interface (Select Code 9)...
Device Name
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
HP 37212A
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x090000
HP 37212A
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x090001
HP 37212A
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x090001
*
The path names given here assume this is the second terminal or modem you
are connecting (i.e., tty02). If this is not the case, change the path names
accordingly (e.g., /dev/tty03 for the third modem, etc.).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-13
HP 37212A 300/1200 Baud Modem
Table 10-3.
If You Connected the Modem to
an HP 98626A, 98628A, 98642A or 98644A Interface
(Select Code 9, 10, 13, 15, 16, 17, 19, 20)...
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
HP 37212A on select code 9
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x090000
HP 37212A on select code 9
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x090001
HP 37212A on select code 9
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x090001
HP 37212A on select code 10
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0a0000
HP 37212A on select code 10
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x0a0001
HP 37212A on select code 10
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x0a0001
HP 37212A on select code 13
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0d0000
HP 37212A on select code 13
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x0d0001
HP 37212A on select code 13
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x0d0001
HP 37212A on select code 15
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0f0000
HP 37212A on select code 15
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x0f0001
HP 37212A on select code 15
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x0f0001
HP 37212A on select code 16
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x100000
HP 37212A on select code 16
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x100001
HP 37212A on select code 16
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x100001
Device Name
Continued on next page ...
*
10-14
The path names given here assume this is the second terminal or modem you
are connecting (i.e., tty02). If this is not the case, change the path names
accordingly (e.g., /dev/tty03 for the third modem, etc.).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 37212A 300/1200 Baud Modem
If You Connected the Modem to
an HP 98626A, 98628A, 98642A or 98644A Interface
(Select Code 9, 10, 13, 15, 16, 17, 19, 20) ...
(Continued)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
HP 37212A on select code 17
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x110000
HP 37212A on select code 17
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x110001
HP 37212A on select code 17
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x110001
HP 37212A on select code 19
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x130000
HP 37212A on select code 19
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x130001
HP 37212A on select code 19
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x130001
HP 37212A on select code 20
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x140000
HP 37212A on select code 20
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x140001
HP 37212A on select code 20
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x140001
Device Name
Continued on next page ...
*
The path names given here assume this is the second terminal or modem you
are connecting (i.e., tty02). If this is not the case, change the path names
accordingly (e.g., /dev/tty03 for the third modem, etc.).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-15
HP 45911A Graphics Tablet
Description and Support
The HP 45911A is an 11 x 11-inch graphics tablet suitable for menu/object
picking, freehand graphics entry and digitizing. The tablet includes a stylus
with tip switch and a platen overlay. It connects to your computer via the
HP-HIL interface.
HP 45911A Graphics Tablet
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
10-16
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 45911A Graphics Tablet
Installation Procedure
Note
Connecting and disconnecting HP-HIL devices while some
language/operating systems or application programs are
running may lead to unpredictable results. When possible,
connect all needed HP-HIL devices to your computer before
booting a language/operating system or running an application
program.
1. Find the HP-HIL cable that came with the tablet.
2. Find the end of the cable that is marked with one black dot.
3. Find the HP-HIL connector on the tablet that is marked with one dot.
4. Plug the “one-dot” end of the cable into the “one-dot” connector on the
tablet.
5. Connect the other, “two-dot” end of the cable into the HP-HIL connector
on your computer (marked “KYBD” or “KEYBOARD”), or to the “two-dot”
connector of the last HP-HIL device you installed (e.g. keyboard).
6. Plug the stylus into the telephone jack on the tablet.
7. Keep these constraints in mind:
■ You cannot have more than 7 HP-HIL addressable devices connected to
your computer at one time. The HP 46080A, 46081 A, 46082A and 46082B
Extension modules and the HP 46089A Four-Button Cursor do not count
as addressable devices, and the HP 46085A Control Dials Module counts
as three addressable devices. All other devices count as one addressable
device.
■ The current requirements of all of your devices must not exceed 750
milliamps (mA). To make sure you do not exceed this requirement, total
up the typical power required by each of your HP-HIL devices as given in
the following “Worksheet Entries” sections. If the total exceeds 750 mA,
you must remove one or more devices.
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-17
HP 45911A Graphics Tablet
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 45911A Graphics Tablet.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
tablet with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Note
HP-HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP-HIL
interface without affecting the HP-UX operating system.
However, if your application requires the use of a particular
device and you remove the device from the link, open the
link to the device, or open the link to add a new device, your
application might not recognize the change and may not work
as expected.
Table 10-4.
45911A Graphics Tablet
Worksheet Entries
Device Name
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
Power
Req.
HP 45911A
/dev/r8042
c
23
0x000000
133 mA
HP 45911A
/dev/digitizer
c
24
0x000020
133 mA
*
The second minor number in the table assumes the graphics tablet is the second
device on the HP-HIL interface (address=2). If this is not the case, substitute
the correct position (address) of the tablet in place of the 2 in the minor number
(e.g., if the tablet is the third device on the interface, the minor number would
be 0x000030).
10-18
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 46020/21 Keyboards
Description and Support
The HP 46020/21 Keyboards are offered in 17 languages and connect to your
computer via the HP-HIL interface.
HP 46020/21 Keyboards
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-19
HP 46020/21 Keyboards
Installation Procedure
Note
Connecting and disconnecting HP-HIL devices while some
language/operating systems or application programs are
running may lead to unpredictable results. When possible,
connect all needed HP-HIL devices to your computer before
booting a language/operating system or running an application
program.
1. Find the HP-HIL cable that came with your computer.
2. Find the end of the cable that is marked with one black dot.
3. Find the connector on the back of the keyboard that is marked with one
dot.
4. Plug the “one-dot” end of the cable into the “one-dot” connector on the
keyboard.
5. Connect the other, ‘two-dot” end of the cable into the HP-HIL connector
on your computer (marked “KYBD” or “KEYBOARD”), or to the “two-dot”
connector of the last HP-HIL device you installed.
6. Keep these constraints in mind:
■ You cannot have more than 7 HP-HIL addressable devices connected to
your computer at one time. The HP 46080A, 46081 A, 46082A and 46082B
Extension modules and the HP 46089A Four-Button Cursor do not count
as addressable devices, and the HP 46085A Control Dials Module counts
as three addressable devices. All other devices count as one addressable
device.
■ The current requirements of all of your devices must not exceed 750
milliamps (mA). To make sure you do not exceed this requirement, total
up the typical power required by each of your HP-HIL devices as given in
the following “Worksheet Entries” sections. If the total exceeds 750 mA,
you must remove one or more devices.
10-20
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 46020/21 Keyboards
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 46020/21 Keyboard.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
keyboard with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Note
HP-HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP-HIL
interface without affecting the HP-UX operating system.
However, if your application requires the use of a particular
device and you remove the device from the link, open the
link to the device, or open the link to add a new device, your
application might not recognize the change and may not work
as expected.
Table 10-5.
HP 46020/21 Keyboard
Worksheet Entries
Device Name
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
Power
Req.
HP 46020/21
/dev/r8042
c
23
0x000000
67 mA
HP 46020/21
/dev/rkbd
c
24
0x000010
67 mA
*
The second minor number in the table assumes the keyboard is the first device
on the HP-HIL interface (address=1). If this is not the case, substitute the
correct position (address) of the keyboard in place of the 1 in the minor number
(e.g., if the keyboard is the third device on the interface, the minor number
would be 0x000030).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-21
HP 46060A/B Mouse
Description and Support
The HP 46060A is a two-button mouse; the HP 46060B is a three-button
mouse. Both connect to your computer via the HP-HIL interface and must be
the last device in the chain of HP-HIL devices connected to the interface.
HP 46060A/B Mouse
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
10-22
with Product
on Release
with Model
46060A
5.0 or later
all Series 300
46060B
5.2 or later
all Series 300
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
Installation Procedure
Note
HP 46060A/B Mouse
Connecting and disconnecting HP-HIL devices while some
language/operating systems or application programs are
running may lead to unpredictable results. When possible,
connect all needed HP-HIL devices to your computer before
booting a language/operating system or running an application
program.
1. Install all other HP-HIL devices first. The HP 46060A/B Mouse must be
the last device you connect to the interface.
2. Turn the mouse upside down and locate the ball housing cover. Remove the
ball housing cover by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Insert the ball into its housing. Replace the cover and secure it by turning it
clockwise.
4. Connect the end of the mouse cable into the “two-dot” HP-HIL connector of
the last HP-HIL device you installed. If you’ve just installed your computer,
the last HP-HIL device you installed is your keyboard.
5. Keep these constraints in mind:
■ You cannot have more than 7 HP-HIL addressable devices connected to
your computer at one time. The HP 46080A, 46081 A, 46082A and 46082B
Extension modules and the HP 46089A Four-Button Cursor do not count
as addressable devices, and the HP 46085A Control Dials Module counts
as three addressable devices. All other devices count as one addressable
device.
■ The current requirements of all of your devices must not exceed 750
milliamps (mA). To make sure you do not exceed this requirement, total
up the typical power required by each of your HP-HIL devices as given in
the following “Worksheet Entries” sections. If the total exceeds 750 mA,
you must remove one or more devices.
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-23
HP 46060A/B Mouse
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 46060A/B Mouse.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
mouse with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Note
HP-HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP-HIL
interface without affecting the HP-UX operating system.
However, if your application requires the use of a particular
device and you remove the device from the link, open the
link to the device, or open the link to add a new device, your
application might not recognize the change and may not work
as expected.
Table 10-6.
HP 46060A/B Mouse
Worksheet Entries
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
Power
Req.
HP 46060A/B
/dev/r8042
c
23
0x000000
133 mA
HP 46060A/B
/dev/mouse
c
24
0x000020
133 mA
Device Name
*
10-24
The second minor number in the table assumes the mouse is the second device
on the HP-HIL interface (address=2). If this is not the case, substitute the
correct position (address) of the mouse in place of the 2 in the minor number
(e.g., if the mouse is the third device on the interface, the minor number would
be 0x000030).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 46080A Extension Module
Description and Support
The HP 46080A is used to extend the distance between HP-HIL devices. It
connects to your computer via the HP-HIL interface, and occupies no HP-HIL
address.
HP 46080A Extension Module
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-25
HP 46080A Extension Module
Installation Procedure
Note
Connecting and disconnecting HP-HIL devices while some
language/operating systems or application programs are
running may lead to unpredictable results. When possible,
connect all needed HP-HIL devices to your computer before
booting a language/operating system or running an application
program.
1. Select a suitable mounting location for the connector box. Remove the
paper backing from the back of the fastener pad. Place the pad at the
location and press down firmly for a few seconds. Attach the connector box
to the fastener pad.
2. Turn the computer off.
3. Find the end of the HP-HIL cable that is marked with one black dot.
4. Find the HP-HIL connector on the connector box that is marked with one
dot.
5. Plug the “one-dot” end of the cable into the “one-dot” connector on the
connector box.
6. Connect the other, “two-dot” end of the cable into the HP-HIL connector
on your computer (marked “KYBD” or “KEYBOARD”), or to the “two-dot”
connector of the last HP-HIL device you installed (e.g. keyboard).
7. Keep these constraints in mind:
■ You cannot have more than 7 HP-HIL addressable devices connected to
your computer at one time. The HP 46080A, 46081 A, 46082A and 46082B
Extension modules and the HP 46089A Four-Button Cursor do not count
as addressable devices, and the HP 46085A Control Dials Module counts
as three addressable devices. All other devices count as one addressable
device.
■ The current requirements of all of your devices must not exceed 750
milliamps (mA). To make sure you do not exceed this requirement, total
up the typical power required by each of your HP-HIL devices as given in
the following “Worksheet Entries” sections. If the total exceeds 750 mA,
you must remove one or more devices.
10-26
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 46080A Extension Module
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 46080A Extension Module.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your HP
46080A with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Note
HP-HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP-HIL
interface without affecting the HP-UX operating system.
However, if your application requires the use of a particular
device and you remove the device from the link, open the
link to the device, or open the link to add a new device, your
application might not recognize the change and may not work
as expected.
Table 10-7.
HP 46080A Extension Module
Worksheet Entries
Device Name
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
Power
Req.
HP 46080A
—
—
—
—
17 mA
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-27
HP 46081A Speaker Module
Description and Support
The HP 46081A Speaker Module is used to extend the distance between
HP-HIL devices and includes an audio speaker on a separate circuit, with a
3m audio cable. It connects to your computer via the HP-HIL interface, and
occupies no HP-HIL address.
HP 46081A Speaker Module
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
10-28
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
Installation Procedure
Note
HP 46081A Speaker Module
Connecting and disconnecting HP-HIL devices while some
language/ operating systems or application programs are
running may lead to unpredictable results. When possible,
connect all needed HP-HIL devices to your computer before
booting a language/operating system or running an application
program.
1. Select a suitable mounting location for the Speaker Module. Remove the
paper backing from the back of the fastener pad. Place the pad at the
location and press down firmly for a few seconds. Attach the Speaker
Module to the fastener pad.
2. Turn the computer off and check whether there is an existing HP-HIL cable
connected to the “KYBD” (or “KEYBOARD”) connector on the back of the
computer. If so, disconnect it.
3. Find the end of the HP-HIL cable that is marked with one black dot.
4. Find the connector on the back of the Speaker Module that is marked with
one dot.
5. Plug the “one-dot” end of the cable into the “one-dot” connector on the
Speaker Module.
6. Connect the other, “two-dot” end of the cable into the HP-HIL connector on
your computer (marked “KYBD” or “KEYBOARD”).
7. Plug either end of the furnished audio cable into the audio jack on the
Speaker Module. Plug the other end of the audio cable into the audio jack
near the HP-HIL connector on your computer.
8. If you disconnected an HP-HIL device from the computer in step 2,
reconnect it to the “two-dot” jack on the speaker module.
9. Keep these constraints in mind:
■ You cannot have more than 7 HP-HIL addressable devices connected to
your computer at one time. The HP 46080A, 46081 A, 46082A and 46082B
Extension modules and the HP 46089A Four-Button Cursor do not count
as addressable devices, and the HP 46085A Control Dials Module counts
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-29
HP 46081A Speaker Module
as three addressable devices. All other devices count as one addressable
device.
■ The current requirements of all of your devices must not exceed 750
milliamps (mA). To make sure you do not exceed this requirement, total
up the typical power required by each of your HP-HIL devices as given in
the following “Worksheet Entries” sections. If the total exceeds 750 mA,
you must remove one or more devices.
10-30
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 46081A Speaker Module
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 46081A Speaker Module.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your HP
46081A with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Note
HP-HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP-HIL
interface without affecting the HP-UX operating system.
However, if your application requires the use of a particular
device and you remove the device from the link, open the
link to the device, or open the link to add a new device, your
application might not recognize the change and may not work
as expected.
Table 10-8.
HP 46081A Speaker Module
Worksheet Entries
Device Name
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
Power
Req.
HP 46081A
—
—
—
—
17 mA
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-31
HP 46082A/B Remote Extension Modules
Description and Support
The HP 46082A/B are used to extend the distance between HP-HIL devices
and between monitors and their video interfaces. Both connect to your
computer via the HP-HIL interface, and occupy no HP-HIL addresses.
HP 46082A/B Remote Extension Modules
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
10-32
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
Installation Procedure
Note
HP 46082A/B Remote Extension Modules
Connecting and disconnecting HP-HIL devices while some
language/operating systems or application programs are
running may lead to unpredictable results. When possible,
connect all needed HP-HIL devices to your computer before
booting a language/operating system or running an application
program.
1. Install the Control Boxes.
a. Select mounting locations for the control boxes. The control box near the
computer must be within 500mm (1.64 feet) of the back of the computer.
b. Remove the paper covering from the back of the fastener pads.
c. Place the fastener pads at the selected locations and press down firmly
for a few seconds.
d. Slide the control boxes onto the fastener pads from the side.
e. Twist the control boxes a few degrees to lock them onto the fastener
pads.
2. Connect the Extension Module.
a. Turn the computer off and check whether there is an existing HP-HIL
cable connected to the “KYBD” (or “KEYBOARD”) connector on the
back of the computer. If so, disconnect it.
b. Get the short HP-HIL cable. Find the end of this cable that is marked
with one black dot.
c. Look at the control module nearest the computer. Find the connector on
the back of this control module that is marked with one dot.
d. Plug the “one-dot” end of the short HP-HIL cable into the “one-dot”
connector on the nearest control module.
e. Connect the other, “two-dot” end of the short HP-HIL cable into
the HP-HIL connector on your computer (marked “KYBD” or
“KEYBOARD”).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-33
HP 46082A/B Remote Extension Modules
f.
Plug either end of the furnished audio cable into the audio jack on the
same control module. Plug the other end of the audio cable into the
audio jack near the HP-HIL connector on your computer.
g. Plug either end of the extension cable into the control box nearest the
computer.
h. Plug the other end of the extension cable into the other (distant) control
box.
i
If you disconnected an HP-HIL device from the computer in step 2-a,
reconnect it to the “two-dot” jack on the distant control box.
j.
Plug one end of each video cable into the corresponding video connector
in the computer. The ends are interchangeable. Refer to the red, green
and blue labels attached to the cables.
k. Plug the other end of each video cable into the video input connectors on
the monitor. Again refer to the color-coded labels attached to the cables.
3. Keep These Constraints In Mind:
■ You cannot have more than 7 HP-HIL addressable devices connected to
your computer at one time. The HP 46080A, 46081 A, 46082A and 46082B
Extension modules and the HP 46089A Four-Button Cursor do not count
as addressable devices, and the HP 46085A Control Dials Module counts
as three addressable devices. All other devices count as one addressable
device.
■ The current requirements of all of your devices must not exceed 750
milliamps (mA). To make sure you do not exceed this requirement, total
up the typical power required by each of your HP-HIL devices as given in
the following “Worksheet Entries” sections. If the total exceeds 750 mA,
you must remove one or more devices.
10-34
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 46082A/B Remote Extension Modules
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 46082A/B Remote Extension Module.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your HP
46082A/B with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Note
HP-HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP-HIL
interface without affecting the HP-UX operating system.
However, if your application requires the use of a particular
device and you remove the device from the link, open the
link to the device, or open the link to add a new device, your
application might not recognize the change and may not work
as expected.
Table 10-9.
HP 46082A/B Remote Extension Modules
Worksheet Entries
Device Name
HP 46082A/B
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
Power
Req.
—
—
—
—
33 mA
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-35
HP 46083A Rotary Control Knob
Description and Support
The HP 46083A provides 2-axis relative cursor positioning via a rotary knob
and 2-axis toggle button. It is best suited for text editing and spreadsheet
applications. The HP 46083A connects to your computer via the HP-HIL
interface.
HP 46083A Rotary Control Knob
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
10-36
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
Installation Procedure
Note
HP 46083 Rotary Control Knob
Connecting and disconnecting HP-HIL devices while some
language/operating systems or application programs are
running may lead to unpredictable results. When possible,
connect all needed HP-HIL devices to your computer before
booting a language/operating system or running an application
program.
1. Find the HP-HIL cable that came with the rotary control knob.
2. Find the end of the cable that is marked with one black dot.
3. Find the HP-HIL connector on the rotary control knob that is marked with
one dot.
4. Plug the “one-dot” end of the cable into the “one-dot” connector on the
rotary control knob.
5. Connect the other, “two-dot” end of the cable into the HP-HIL connector
on your computer (marked “KYBD” or “KEYBOARD”), or to the “two-dot”
connector of the last HP-HIL device you installed (e.g. keyboard).
6. Keep these constraints in mind:
■ You cannot have more than 7 HP-HIL addressable devices connected to
your computer at one time. The HP 46080A, 46081 A, 46082A and 46082B
Extension modules and the HP 46089A Four-Button Cursor do not count
as addressable devices, and the HP 46085A Control Dials Module counts
as three addressable devices. All other devices count as one addressable
device.
■ The current requirements of all of your devices must not exceed 750
milliamps (mA). To make sure you do not exceed this requirement, total
up the typical power required by each of your HP-HIL devices as given in
the following “Worksheet Entries” sections. If the total exceeds 750 mA,
you must remove one or more devices.
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-37
HP 46083 Rotary Control Knob
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 46083A Rotary Control Knob.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
rotary control knob with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Note
HP-HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP-HIL
interface without affecting the HP-UX operating system.
However, if your application requires the use of a particular
device and you remove the device from the link, open the
link to the device, or open the link to add a new device, your
application might not recognize the change and may not work
as expected.
Table 10-10.
HP 46083A Rotary Control Knob
Worksheet Entries
Device Name
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
Power
Req.
HP 46083A
/dev/r8042
c
23
0x000000
73 mA
HP 46083A
/dev/knob
c
24
0x000020
73 mA
*
10-38
The second minor number in the table assumes the rotary control knob is the
second device on the HP-HIL interface (address=2). If this is not the case,
substitute the correct position (address) of the rotary control knob in place of
the 2 in the minor number (e.g., if the rotary control knob is the third device on
the interface, the minor number would be 0x000030).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 46084A ID Module
Description and Support
The HP 46084A ID Module contains a unique, machine-readable serial number
required by software which uses HP’s “Codeword Delivery” security scheme
(e.g., HP 98305A HP EGS), or software which is customized to an HP 46084A.
It connects to your computer via the HP-HIL interface.
HP 46084A ID Module
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-39
HP 46084A ID Module
Installation Procedure
Note
Connecting and disconnecting HP-HIL devices while some
language/operating systems or application programs are
running may lead to unpredictable results. When possible,
connect all needed HP-HIL devices to your computer before
booting a language/operating system or running an application
program.
1. Find the HP-HIL cable that came with the ID Module.
2. Find the end of the cable that is marked with one black dot.
3. Find the HP-HIL connector on the ID Module that is marked with one dot.
4. Plug the “one-dot” end of the cable into the “one-dot” connector on the ID
Module.
5. Connect the other, “two-dot” end of the cable into the HP-HIL connector
on your computer (marked “KYBD” or “KEYBOARD”), or to the “two-dot”
connector of the last HP-HIL device you installed (e.g. keyboard).
6. Keep these constraints in mind:
■ You cannot have more than 7 HP-HIL addressable devices connected to
your computer at one time. The HP 46080A, 46081 A, 46082A and 46082B
Extension modules and the HP 46089A Four-Button Cursor do not count
as addressable devices, and the HP 46085A Control Dials Module counts
as three addressable devices. All other devices count as one addressable
device.
■ The current requirements of all of your devices must not exceed 750
milliamps (mA). To make sure you do not exceed this requirement, total
up the typical power required by each of your HP-HIL devices as given in
the following “Worksheet Entries” sections. If the total exceeds 750 mA,
you must remove one or more devices.
10-40
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 46084A ID Module
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 46084A ID Module.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your ID
Module with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Note
HP-HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP-HIL
interface without affecting the HP-UX operating system.
However, if your application requires the use of a particular
device and you remove the device from the link, open the
link to the device, or open the link to add a new device, your
application might not recognize the change and may not work
as expected.
Table 10-11.
HP 46084A ID Module
Worksheet Entries
Device Name
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
Power
Req.
HP 46084A
/dev/r8042
c
23
0x000000
40 mA
HP 46084A
/dev/security
c
24
0x000020
40 mA
*
The second minor number in the table assumes the ID Module is the second
device on the HP-HIL interface (address=2). If this is not the case, substitute
the correct position (address) of the ID Module in place of the 2 in the minor
number (e.g., if the ID Module is the third device on the interface, the minor
number would be 0x000030).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-41
HP 46085A Control Dials Module
Description and Support
The HP 46085A Control Dials Module provides nine graphics positioning
devices, implemented as three 3-axis devices. The control dials module is
commonly used in graphics display applications to provide 3-axis attitude,
3-axis translation, scaling and other attribute functions. It connects to your
computer via the HP-HIL interface and occupies 3 addresses.
HP 46085A Control Dials Module
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
10-42
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
Installation Procedure
Note
HP 46085A Control Dials Module
Connecting and disconnecting HP-HIL devices while some
language/operating systems or application programs are
running may lead to unpredictable results. When possible,
connect all needed HP-HIL devices to your computer before
booting a language/operating system or running an application
program.
1. Find the HP-HIL cable that came with the control dials module.
2. Find the end of the cable that is marked with one black dot.
3. Find the HP-HIL connector on the control dials module that is marked with
one dot.
4. Plug the “one-dot” end of the cable into the “one-dot” connector on the
control dials module.
5. Connect the other, “two-dot” end of the cable into the HP-HIL connector
on your computer (marked “KYBD” or “KEYBOARD”), or to the “two-dot”
connector of the last HP-HIL device you installed (e.g. keyboard).
6. Keep these constraints in mind:
■ You cannot have more than 7 HP-HIL addressable devices connected to
your computer at one time. The HP 46080A, 46081 A, 46082A and 46082B
Extension modules and the HP 46089A Four-Button Cursor do not count
as addressable devices, and the HP 46085A Control Dials Module counts
as three addressable devices. All other devices count as one addressable
device.
■ The current requirements of all of your devices must not exceed 750
milliamps (mA). To make sure you do not exceed this requirement, total
up the typical power required by each of your HP-HIL devices as given in
the following “Worksheet Entries” sections. If the total exceeds 750 mA,
you must remove one or more devices.
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-43
HP 46085A Control Dials Module
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 46085A Control Dials Module.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
control dials module with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Note
10-44
HP-HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP-HIL
interface without affecting the HP-UX operating system.
However, if your application requires the use of a particular
device and you remove the device from the link, open the
link to the device, or open the link to add a new device, your
application might not recognize the change and may not work
as expected.
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 46085A Control Dials Module
Table 10-12.
HP 46085A Control Dials Module
Worksheet Entries
Device Name
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
Power
Req.
HP 46085A
/dev/r8042
c
23
0x000000
213mA
HP 46085A
/dev/dial.top
c
24
0x000020
213mA
HP 46085A
/dev/dial.mid
c
24
0x000030
213mA
HP 46085A
/dev/dial.bot
c
24
0x000040
213mA
*
The second, third and fourth minor numbers in the table assume the control
dials module is the second device on the HP-HIL interface, thus occupying
addresses 2, 3 and 4. If this is not the case, substitute the correct position
(address) of the control dials module in place of the 2 in the second minor
number, and change the third and fourth minor numbers accordingly (e.g., if
the device is the fourth device on the interface, the last three minor numbers
would be 0x000040, 0x000050 and 0x000060, respectively).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-45
HP 46086A Button Box
Description and Support
The HP 46086A Button Box provides 32 user-definable buttons for menu
selection, and one user-programmable LED. Buttons can be labeled with defined
functions, freeing the display for other uses. It includes one pre-printed and two
blank overlays, and connects to your computer via the HP-HIL interface.
HP 46086A Button Box
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
10-46
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 46086A Button Box
Installation Procedure
Note
Connecting and disconnecting HP-HIL devices while some
language/operating systems or application programs are
running may lead to unpredictable results. When possible,
connect all needed HP-HIL devices to your computer before
booting a language/operating system or running an application
program.
1. Find the HP-HIL cable that came with the button box.
2. Find the end of the cable that is marked with one black dot.
3. Find the HP-HIL connector on the button box that is marked with one dot.
4. Plug the “one-dot” end of the cable into the “one-dot” connector on the
button box.
5. Connect the other, “two-dot” end of the cable into the HP-HIL connector
on your computer (marked “KYBD” or “KEYBOARD”), or to the “two-dot”
connector of the last HP-HIL device you installed (e.g. keyboard).
6. Keep these constraints in mind:
■ You cannot have more than 7 HP-HIL addressable devices connected to
your computer at one time. The HP 46080A, 46081 A, 46082A and 46082B
Extension modules and the HP 46089A Four-Button Cursor do not count
as addressable devices, and the HP 46085A Control Dials Module counts
as three addressable devices. All other devices count as one addressable
device.
■ The current requirements of all of your devices must not exceed 750
milliamps (mA). To make sure you do not exceed this requirement, total
up the typical power required by each of your HP-HIL devices as given in
the following “Worksheet Entries” sections. If the total exceeds 750 mA,
you must remove one or more devices.
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-47
HP 46086A Button Box
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 46086A Button Box.
The following ‘’Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
button box with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Note
HP-HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP-HIL
interface without affecting the HP-UX operating system.
However, if your application requires the use of a particular
device and you remove the device from the link, open the
link to the device, or open the link to add a new device, your
application might not recognize the change and may not work
as expected.
Table 10-13.
HP 46086A Button Box
Worksheet Entries
Device Name
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
Power
Req.
HP 46086A
/dev/r8042
c
23
0x000000
53 mA
HP 46086A
/dev/buttons
c
24
0x000020
53 mA
*
10-48
The second minor number in the table assumes the button box is the second
device on the HP-HIL interface (address=2). If this is not the case, substitute
the correct position (address) of the button box in place of the 2 in the minor
number (e.g., if the button box is the third device on the interface, the minor
number would be 0x000030).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 46087/88A Digitizers and HP 46089A Cursor
Description and Support
The HP 46087A and 46088A are low-cost, high-resolution digitizers suitable for
menu/object picking, free-hand graphics entry and digitizing. The HP 46087A
is ANSI A/ISO A4 size. The HP 46088A is ANSI B/ISO A3. Both digitizers
include a stylus with tip switch and a platen overlay. Both digitizers connect to
your computer via the HP-HIL interface.
The HP 46089A four-button, cross-hair cursor is available separately or as
digitizer Option 001. The cursor is recommended for digitizing existing
drawings, artwork or other hard-copy images. It uses no additional power and
occupies no HP-HIL addresses.
HP 46087/88A Digitizer and HP 46089A Cursor
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-49
HP 46087/88A Digitizers
and 46089A Cursor
Installation Procedure
Note
Connecting and disconnecting HP-HIL devices while some
language/operating systems or application programs are
running may lead to unpredictable results. When possible,
connect all needed HP-HIL devices to your computer before
booting a language/operating system or running an application
program.
1. Find the HP-HIL cable that came with the digitizer.
2. Find the end of the cable that is marked with one black dot.
3. Find the HP-HIL connector on the digitizer that is marked with one dot.
4. Plug the “one-dot” end of the cable into the “one-dot” connector on the
digitizer.
5. Connect the other, “two-dot” end of the cable into the HP-HIL connector
on your computer (marked “KYBD” or “KEYBOARD”), or to the “two-dot”
connector of the last HP-HIL device you installed (e.g. keyboard).
6. Plug the stylus or HP 46089A Cursor into the round connector on the
digitizer.
7. Keep these constraints in mind:
■ You cannot have more than 7 HP-HIL addressable devices connected to
your computer at one time. The HP 46080A, 46081 A, 46082A and 46082B
Extension modules and the HP 46089A Four-Button Cursor do not count
as addressable devices, and the HP 46085A Control Dials Module counts
as three addressable devices. All other devices count as one addressable
device.
■ The current requirements of all of your devices must not exceed 750
milliamps (mA). To make sure you do not exceed this requirement, total
up the typical power required by each of your HP-HIL devices as given in
the following “Worksheet Entries” sections. If the total exceeds 750 mA,
you must remove one or more devices.
10-50
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 46087/88A Digitizers
and 46089A Cursor
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 46087/88 Digitizer and your HP 46089A Cursor.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
digitizer with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Note
HP-HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP-HIL
interface without affecting the HP-UX operating system.
However, if your application requires the use of a particular
device and you remove the device from the link, open the
link to the device, or open the link to add a new device, your
application might not recognize the change and may not work
as expected.
Table 10-14.
HP 46087/88A Digitizers and
HP 46089A Cursor
Worksheet Entries
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
Power
Req.
HP 46087A/88/89A
/dev/r8042
c
23
0x000000
133 mA
HP 46087A/88/89A
/dev/digitizer
c
24
0x000020
133 mA
Device Name
*
The second minor number in the table assumes the digitizer is the second device
on the HP-HIL interface (address=2). If this is not the case, substitute the
correct position (address) of the digitizer in place of the 2 in the minor number
(e.g., if the digitizer is the third device on the interface, the minor number would
be 0x000030).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-51
HP 46094A Quadrature Port
Description and Support
The HP 46094A Quadrature Port is used to connect an off-the-shelf
three-button mouse or other compatible device to the HP-HIL interface.
Check with your local HP Sales and Service office for support information.
10-52
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
Installation Procedure
Note
HP 46094A Quadrature Port
Connecting and disconnecting HP-HIL devices while some
language/operating systems or application programs are
running may lead to unpredictable results. When possible,
connect all needed HP-HIL devices to your computer before
booting a language/operating system or running an application
program.
1. Select a suitable mounting location for the quadrature port. Remove the
paper backing from the back of the fastener pad. Place the pad at the
location and press down firmly for a few seconds. Slide the module unit onto
the fastener pad from the side and twist the module unit a few degrees to
lock it onto the fastener pad.
2. Find the end of the HP-HIL cable that is marked with one black dot.
3. Find the connector on the back of the quadrature port that is marked with
one dot.
4. Plug the “one-dot” end of the cable into the “one-dot” connector on the
quadrature port.
5. Connect the other, “two-dot” end of the cable into the HP-HIL connector
on your computer (marked “KYBD” or “KEYBOARD”), or to the “two-dot”
connector of the last HP-HIL device you installed (e.g., keyboard).
6. Connect the 3-button mouse (or other compatible device) to the 9-pin
D-subminiature connector on the quadrature port and fasten the two screws
with a screwdriver.
7. Keep these constraints in mind:
■ You cannot have more than 7 HP-HIL addressable devices connected to
your computer at one time. The HP 46080A, 46081 A, 46082A and 46082B
Extension modules and the HP 46089A Four-Button Cursor do not count
as addressable devices, and the HP 46085A Control Dials Module counts
as three addressable devices. All other devices count as one addressable
device.
■ The current requirements of all of your devices must not exceed 750
milliamps (mA). To make sure you do not exceed this requirement, total
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-53
HP 46094A Quadrature Port
up the typical power required by each of your HP-HIL devices as given in
the following “Worksheet Entries” sections. If the total exceeds 750 mA,
you must remove one or more devices.
10-54
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 46094A Quadrature Port
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 46094A Quadrature Port.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your HP
46094A with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Note
HP-HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP-HIL
interface without affecting the HP-UX operating system.
However, if your application requires the use of a particular
device and you remove the device from the link, open the
link to the device, or open the link to add a new device, your
application might not recognize the change and may not work
as expected.
Table 10-15.
HP 46094A Quadrature Port
Worksheet Entries
Device Name
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
Power
Req.
HP 46094A
/dev/r8042
c
23
0x000000
125 mA
HP 46094A
/dev/quad
c
24
0x000020
125 mA
*
The second minor number in the table assumes the quadrature port is the
second device on the HP-HIL interface (address=2). If this is not the case,
substitute the correct position (address) of the quadrature port in place of the
2 in the minor number (e.g., if the quadrature port is the third device on the
interface, the minor number would be 0x000030).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-55
HP 92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem 1200
Description and Support
The HP 92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem 1200 connects to your computer via an
RS-232C interface.
HP 92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem 1200
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
10-56
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
Installation Procedure
HP 92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem 1200
The following procedure describes how to connect the Smartmodem 1200 to your
computer. Before you do this, however, refer to the manual that came with the
modem to:
■ Unpack the modem.
■ Contact the telephone company.
And now, the installation procedure ...
1. Play It Safe.
Turn your computer and modem off, if they are not already off.
2. Connect the Telephone Cable.
a. With the gold contacts up, plug one end of the modular telephone cable
into the telephone connector on the back of the modem.
b. Insert the remaining end of the telephone cable into a telephone wall
jack.
3. Select Your Interface and Cable.
The modem can be connected to any of the following RS-232C interfaces:
■ Series 200 Model 216 or 217 built-in “Data Communications” interface—
use an HP 5061-4215 DTE cable.
■ Series 300 built-in RS-232C interface—use an HP 13242N or 92221M
cable.
■ HP 98626A RS-232C Interface—use an HP 5061-4215 (Option 001 DTE)
cable.
■ HP 98628A Datacomm Interface—use an HP 5061-4215 (Option 001
DTE) cable.
■ HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface, port 0 (HP-UX only)—
use an HP 92219S, 92218A or 92222M cable. Ports 1, 2 and 3 are not
recommended for use with the modem.
■ HP 98644A RS-232C Serial Interface—use an HP 13242N, 92218A or
92222M cable.
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-57
HP 92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem 1200
4. Connect the Modem to Your Computer.
Connect the cable between the modem and the interface.
5. Connect the Power Cord.
Connect the power cord into the power connector on the back of the modem,
and plug the other end into your power outlet.
10-58
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
Worksheet Entries
HP 92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem 1200
You have now installed your modem.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your
modem with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Table 10-16.
If You Connected the Modem to
a Series 300 Built-in Interface (Select Code 9)...
Device Name
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
Smartmodem
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x090000
Smartmodem
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x090001
Smartmodem
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x090001
*
The path names given in the Worksheet Entries assume this is the second
terminal or modem you are connecting (i.e., tty02). If this is not the case,
change the path names accordingly (e.g., /dev/tty03 for the third modem, etc.).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-59
HP 92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem 1200
Table 10-17.
If You Connected the Modem to an HP 98626A, 98628A, 98642A
or 98644A Interface (Select Code 9, 10, 13, 15, 16, 17, 19, 20).
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
Smartmodem, select code 9
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x090000
Smartmodem, select code 9
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x090001
Smartmodem, select code 9
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x090001
Smartmodem, select code 10
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0a0000
Smartmodem, select code 10
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x0a0001
Smartmodem, select code 10
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x0a0001
Smartmodem, select code 13
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0d0000
Smartmodem, select code 13
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x0d0001
Smartmodem, select code 13
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x0d0001
Smartmodem, select code 15
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x0f0000
Smartmodem, select code 15
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x0f0001
Smartmodem, select code 15
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x0f0001
Smartmodem, select code 16
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x100000
Smartmodem, select code 16
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x100001
Smartmodem, select code 16
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x100001
Device Name
Continued on next page ...
*
10-60
The path names given in the Worksheet Entries assume this is the second
terminal or modem you are connecting (i.e., tty02). If this is not the case,
change the path names accordingly (e.g., /dev/tty03 for the third modem, etc.).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem 1200
If You Connected the Modem to an HP 98626A, 98628A, 98642A
or 98644A Interface (Select Code 9, 10, 13, 15, 16, 17, 19, 20)...
(continued)
Path*
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor
Number
Smartmodem, select code 17
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x110000
Smartmodem, select code 17
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x110001
Smartmodem, select code 17
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x110001
Smartmodem, select code 19
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x130000
Smartmodem, select code 19
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x130001
Smartmodem, select code 19
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x130001
Smartmodem, select code 20
/dev/tty02
c
1
0x140000
Smartmodem, select code 20
/dev/cua02
c
1
0x140001
Smartmodem, select code 20
/dev/cul02
c
1
0x140001
Device Name
*
The path names given in the Worksheet Entries assume this is the second
terminal or modem you are connecting (i.e., tty02). If this is not the case,
change the path names accordingly (e.g., /dev/tty03 for the third modem, etc.).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-61
HP 92916A Bar Code Reader
Description and Support
The HP 92916A is a general-purpose bar code reader. It connects to your
computer via the HP-HIL interface.
HP 92916A Bar Code Reader
Series 300 HP-UX Operating System Support
10-62
on Release
with Model
5.0 or later
all Series 300
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 92916A Bar Code Reader
Installation Procedure
Note
Connecting and disconnecting HP-HIL devices while some
language/operating systems or application programs are
running may lead to unpredictable results. When possible,
connect all needed HP-HIL devices to your computer before
booting a language/operating system or running an application
program.
1. Find the HP-HIL cable that came with the bar code reader.
2. Find the end of the cable that is marked with one black dot.
3. Find the HP-HIL connector on the bar code reader that is marked with one
dot.
4. Plug the “one-dot” end of the cable into the “one-dot” connector on the bar
code reader.
5. Connect the other, “two-dot” end of the cable into the HP-HIL connector
on your computer (marked “KYBD” or “KEYBOARD”), or to the “two-dot”
connector of the last HP-HIL device you installed (e.g. keyboard).
NOTE!
Connect your HP 46020/21 keyboard to the HP-HIL interface
before connecting the bar code reader. The keyboard must be
“upstream” from the bar code reader in the chain of HP-HIL
devices.
6. Connect the wand to the bar code reader.
7. Set the Configuration Switches:
a. Set the code selection switches, 1 through 3, according to your
application:
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-63
HP 92916A Bar Code Reader
Table 10-18.
HP 92916A Bar Code Reader
Configuration Switches
Definition
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 3
Interleaved 2/5
0
0
1
Codebar ABC
0
1
0
Codabar USD-4
0
1
1
UPC/EAN/JAN
1
0
0
Code 39
1
0
1
b. Set the transmission type switch, 4, to “Keycode” by setting it to 1.
c. Set the keyboard selection switches, 5 through 8, according to which
keyboard you have. Set all switches to 0 for a US ASCII keyboard. Refer
to your bar code reader manual for additional settings.
d. Set the appended control switches, 9 and 10, to select Return by setting
switch 9 to 0 and switch 10 to 1.
e. Set the check digit switch, 11, to off (0) or on (1) depending on your
application. This switch has no meaning in UPC/EAN applications.
f.
Set the field length check switches, 12 through 16, to off (all 0) unless
your application requires a different setting.
8. Keep these constraints in mind:
■ You cannot have more than 7 HP-HIL addressable devices connected to
your computer at one time. The HP 46080A, 46081 A, 46082A and 46082B
Extension modules and the HP 46089A Four-Button Cursor do not count
as addressable devices, and the HP 46085A Control Dials Module counts
as three addressable devices. All other devices count as one addressable
device.
■ The current requirements of all of your devices must not exceed 750
milliamps (mA). To make sure you do not exceed this requirement, total
up the typical power required by each of your HP-HIL devices as given in
the following “Worksheet Entries” sections. If the total exceeds 750 mA,
you must remove one or more devices.
10-64
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
HP 92916A Bar Code Reader
Worksheet Entries
You have now installed your HP 92916A Bar Code Reader.
The following “Worksheet Entries” contain information needed to use your bar
code reader with the HP-UX operating system.
Copy this information to a worksheet (worksheets are found at the end of
Chapter 1, “Getting Started”) or remember to refer here when you need it.
When finished, you’ll be ready to install your next peripheral. If you have
installed all of your peripherals, refer to the Series 300 HP-UX System
Administration Tasks manual that came with your HP-UX operating system.
Note
HP-HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP-HIL
interface without affecting the HP-UX operating system.
However, if your application requires the use of a particular
device and you remove the device from the link, open the
link to the device, or open the link to add a new device, your
application might not recognize the change and may not work
as expected.
Table 10-19.
HP 92916A Bar Code Reader
Worksheet Entries
Device Name
Path
Name
File
Type
Major
Number
Minor*
Number
Power
Req.
HP 92916A
/dev/r8042
c
23
0x000000
133 mA
HP 92916A
/dev/wand
c
24
0x000020
133 mA
*
The second minor number in the table assumes the bar code reader is the second
device on the HP-HIL interface (address=2). If this is not the case, substitute
the correct position (address) of the bar code reader in place of the 2 in the
minor number (e.g., if the bar code reader is the third device on the interface,
the minor number would be 0x000030).
Adding Miscellaneous Peripherals
10-65
Index
1
13279B Color Monitor, 8-17–20
2
20GB/A Optical Disk Library System, 68
2225A ThinkJet Printer, 7-2–7
2227A QuietJet Plus Printer, 7-8–14
2227B QuietJet Plus Printer, 7-8–14
2228A QuietJet Printer, 7-8–14
2390-series. See Terminals
2563B Printer, 7-15–19
2564B Printer, 7-15–19
2566B Printer, 7-15–19
2620-series. See Terminals
2684 LaserJet 2000 Printer, 7-20–25
2686A/D LaserJet Printer, 7-26–32
2932A Printer, 7-33–39
2934A Printer, 7-33–39
3
33440A LaserJet-II Printer, 7-26–32
33447A LaserJet-IID Printer, 7-26–32
35723A HP Touch Bezel, 10-2–9
3630A PaintJet Printer, 7-40–44
37212A 300/1200 Baud Modem, 10-10–15
4
45911A Graphics Tablet, 10-16–18
46020/21 Keyboards, 10-19–21
46060A/B Mouse, 10-22–24
46080A Extension Module, 10-25–27
46081A Speaker Module, 10-28–31
46082A/B Remote Extension Modules,
10-32–35
46083A Rotary Control Knob, 10-36–38
46084A ID Module, 10-39–41
46085A Control Dials Module, 10-42–45
46086A Button Box, 10-46–48
46087/88A Digitizers, 10-49–52
46089A Cursor, 10-49–52
46094A Quadrature Port, 10-52–55
4-Channel
Multiplexer
Interface. See
98642A
5
50961A SRM Interface, 5-65
50961A SRM Interfaces, 5-67
6
600/A HP-IB CD-ROM Drive, 6-3–7
650/A Optical Disk Drive, 6-9–13
7
7907A Disk Drive, 6-14–19
7911/12/14 Disk/Tape Drives, 6-20–29
7933/7935 Disk Drives, 6-30–35
7936H/7937H Disk Drives, 6-36–41
7941/42/45/46 Disk/Tape Drives, 6-42–
47
7957/58/59B Disk Drives, 6-104–108
7957/58/59S SCSI Disk Drives, 6-109–
112
7957A/7958A Disk Drives, 6-48–52
Index-1
7961/62/63B Disk Drives, 6-104–108
7974A Tape Drive, 6-53–58
7978A Tape Drive, 6-59–64
7979A/80A/80XC Tape Drives, 6-113–
120
9
9111A Graphics Tablet, 8-8–11
9121/9122 Flexible Disk Drives, 6-65–70
9125S/9127A Flexible Disk Drives, 6-71–
75
9133D/H/L Disk Drives, 6-76–86
9134D/H/L Disk Drives, 6-76–86
9144A Tape Drive, 6-87–92
9153A/9154A Disk Drives, 6-93–103
92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem 1200, 1056–61
92916A Bar Code Reader, 10-62–65
98248A Floating-Point Accelerator, 4-2–5
98248B Floating-Point Accelerator, 4-6–
10
98265A Small Computer Systems Inter-face
(SCSI), 5-107–118
98287A Graphics Display Station Interface, 5-2–8
98546A Display Compatibility Interface,
5-9–13
98548/49/50A High Resolution Video
Boards, 5-95–100
98556A 2D Graphics Accelerator, 4-11–12
98562-66530 Human (System) Interface
Board, 5-85–94
98568A Backplane Expander, 2-2–10
98570A Backplane Expander, 3-3
98577A VMEbus Expander, 2-11–23
98620B DMA Controller Card, 4-13–14
98622A GPIO Interface, 5-14–21
98624A HP-IB Interface, 5-22–27
98625A Disk Interface, 5-28–32
98625B Disk Interface, 5-33–39
98626A RS-232C Interface, 5-40–49
Index-2
98627A Color Output Interface, 5-50–55
98628A Datacomm, 9-3
98628A Datacomm Interface, 5-56–64, 95
98629A SRM Interface, 5-65–67
98635A Floating Point Math Card, 4-15–
16
98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer, 9-3
98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface,
5-68–74, 9-6
98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface, 5-75–77
98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface, 578–84
98644A RS-232C Serial Interface, 9-6
98700 Graphics Display Station, 8-12–16
98720A Graphics Display Station, 8-21–
24
98724A/98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface, 5-101–106
98726A Interface Card, 5-119–126
98730A Graphics Display Station, 8-25–
28
A
Asynchronous Serial Interface. See 98644A
B
Backplane Expander, 3-3. See
98568A Backplane Expander
Bar Code Reader. See 92916A
built-in RS-232C interface, 9-5
Button Box. See 46086A
C
CD-ROM Drives. See 600/A
Color Monitor. See 13279B
Color Output Interface. See 98627A
Control Dials Module. See 46085A
Cursor. See 46089A
also
D
Datacomm Interface. See 98628A
Digitizers. See 46087/88A
DIO to LGB Interface Card. See 98726A
Disk Drives. See 790x, 793x, 795x, 796x,
913x, 915x, 989x
Disk Drives, SCSI. See 795x
Disk Interface. See 98625A, 98625B
Disk/Tape Drives. See 791x, 794x
Display Compatibility Interface. See
98546A
DMA Controller Card. See 98620B
E
Expander, 3-3
Extension Module. See 46080A
F
Flexible Disk Drives. See 912x
Floating-Point Accelerator. See 98248A/B
Floating Point Math Card. See 98635A
G
GPIO Interface. See 98622A
Graphics Accelerator. See 98556A
Graphics Display Station. See 98700,
98720A, 98730A
Graphics Display Station Interface. See
98287A
Graphics Tablet. See 45911A, 9111A
graphics terminals, 9-3. See also Terminals
H
Hayes Smartmodem 1200. See 92205A/C
High Resolution Video Boards. See
98548/49/50A
HP-IB Interface. See 98624A
HP Touch Bezel. See 35723A
HP-UX Minor Numbers, 6-2
Human (System) Interface Board. See
98562-66530
I
ID Module. See 46084A
Installing RAM, Model 320, 3-4–5
Installing RAM, Model 330, 3-9
Installing RAM, Model 350, 3-14–26
Integral PC. See Terminals
Interface Cards Worksheet, 1-4
K
Keyboards. See 46020/21
L
LaserJet 2000 Printer. See 2684
LaserJet-II Printer. See 33440A
LaserJet Printer. See 2686A/D
Local Area Network (LAN) Interface. See
98643A
Local Graphics Bus Interface. See
98724A/98725A
M
Mass Storage Devices Worksheet, 1-4
Memory Configuration Wheel, 3-6–8
Minor
Numbers. See HP-UX Minor
Numbers
Miscellaneous Peripherals Worksheet, 1-6
Modem. See 37212A, 92205A/C
Mouse. See 46060A/B
Multiplexer Interface. See 98642A, 98642A
4-Channel
O
Optical Autochanger. See 20GB/A
Optical Disk Drives. See 650/A
Index-3
P
PaintJet Printer. See 3630A
Plotter (HP-IB Interface), 8-2–7. See also
7440A (Option 002), 7470A (Option
002), 7475A (Option 002), 7550A,
7570A (with 17570A), 7580B, 7585B,
7586B, 7595A, 7596A, 9872C/T
Plotters/Graphics Devices Worksheet, 1-5
Portable. See Terminals
Printer. See 2563B, 2564B, 2566B, 2608S,
2671A, 2671G, 2673A, 2932A, 2934A
Printer, LaserJet. See 2686A/D
Printer, LaserJet 2000. See 2684
Printer, LaserJet-II. See 33440A
Printer, PaintJet. See 3630A
Printer, QuietJet. See 2228A
Printer, QuietJet Plus. See 2227A, 2227B
Printers Worksheet, 1-5
Printer, ThinkJet. See HP 2225A
Q
Quadrature Port. See 46094A
QuietJet Plus Printer. See 2227A, 2227B
QuietJet Printer. See 2228A
R
Release (HP-UX). See Support
Remote Extension Mods. See 46082A/B
Revision (HP-UX). See Support
Rotary Control Knob. See 46083A
RS-232C interface, 9-5
RS-232C Interface. See 98626A
RS-232C Serial Interface. See 98644A
S
SCSI. See 98265A
SCSI Disk Drives. See 795x
Serial Interface. See 98644A
Index-4
Small Computer Systems Interface. See
98265A
Speaker Module. See 46081A
SRM Interface. See 50961A, 98629A
Support
98568A VMEbus Expander, 2-2
98577A VMEbus Expander, 2-11
T
Tape Drives. See 797x, 798x, 914x
Terminals, 9-3–15
Terminals & Displays Worksheet, 1-6
ThinkJet Printer. See 2225A
Touchscreen. See Terminals
V
VMEbus Expander. See 98577A VMEbus
Expander
W
Worksheet
Interface Cards, 1-4
Mass Storage Devices, 1-4
Miscellaneous Peripherals, 1-6
Plotters/Graphics Devices, 1-5
Printers, 1-5
Terminals & Displays, 1-6
Worksheet Entries
13279B Color Monitor, 8-20
2225A ThinkJet, Select Code 7, 7-6
2225A ThinkJet, Select Code 8, 7-7
2227A/28A, 986xx Interface, 7-13
2227A/28A, Built-in Interface, 7-12
2227B, 98624 HP-IB, Select Code 8, 714
2227B, Built-in HP-IB, Select Code 7,
7-13
2563/64/66B, 98624 HP-IB, Select Code
8, 7-19
2563/64/66B, Built-in HP-IB, Select
Code 7, 7-18
2684, 98626/28/44 Interface, 7-24
2684, Built-in Interface, 7-23
2686A/D, 98626/28/44 Interface, 7-30
2686A/D, 98642 Interface, 7-32
2686A/D, Built-in Interface, 7-29
2932/34A, 98624 HP-IB, Select Code 8,
7-39
2932/34A, Built-in HP-IB, Select Code
7, 7-38
33440A, 98626/28/44 Interface, 7-30
33440A, 98642 Interface, 7-32
33440A, Built-in Interface, 7-29
33447A, 98626/28/44 Interface, 7-30
33447A, 98642 Interface, 7-32
33447A, Built-in Interface, 7-29
35723A HP Touch Bezel, 10-9
3630A PaintJet, 98624 HP-IB, Select
Code 8, 7-44
3630A PaintJet, Built-in HP-IB, Select
Code 7, 7-43
37212A 300/1200 Baud Modem, 10-13
45911A Graphics Tablet, 10-18
46020/21 Keyboards, 10-21
46060A/B Mouse, 10-24
46080A Extension Module, 10-27
46081A Speaker Module, 10-31
46082A/B Remote Extension Modules,
10-35
46083A Rotary Control Knob, 10-38
46084A ID Module, 10-41
46085A Control Dials Module, 10-45
46086A Button Box, 10-48
46087/88A Digitizers, 10-52
46089A Cursor, 10-52
46094A Quadrature Port, 10-55
600/A CD-ROM Drive, 98625 Interface, 6-6
600/A CD-ROM Drive, Built-in HPIB, 6-7
650/A Optical Disk Drive, 98265A
Interface, 6-13
7907A Disk, Select Code 14, 6-18
7907A Disk, Select Code 7, 6-19
7911/12/14, 98625 Interface, Select
Code 4, 6-27
7911/12/14, Built-in HP-IB, Select
Code 7, 6-28
7911/12/14 Tape Controller, 98624
HP-IB, 6-29
7911/12/14 Tape Controller, Built-in
HP-IB, 6-29
7933/35 Disk, 98625 Interface, 6-34
7933/35 Disk, Built-in HP-IB, 6-35
7936/37H Disk, 98625 Interface, 6-41
7941/42/45/46 Disk/Tape, 98625 Interface, 6-46
7941/42/45/46 Disk/Tape, Built-in HPIB, 6-47
7957/58/59B Disk Drive, 98625 Interface, 6-107
7957/58/59B Disk Drive, Built-in HPIB, 6-108
7957/58/59S SCSI Drive, 98265A Interface, 6-112
7957A/7958A Disk, 98625 Interface, 651
7957A/7958A Disk, Built-in HP-IB , 652
7961/62/63B Disk Drive, 98625 Interface, 6-107
7961/62/63B Disk Drive, Built-in HPIB, 6-108
7974A Tape Drive, 98625 Interface, 657
7974A Tape Drive, Built-in HP-IB, 658
7978A Tape Drive, 98625 Interface, 663
7978A Tape Drive, Built-in HP-IB, 664
Index-5
7979/80A Tape Drive, 98625 Interface,
6-117
7979/80A Tape Drive, Built-in HP-IB,
6-118
7980XC Tape Drive, 98625 Interface, 6119
7980XC Tape Drive, Built-in HP-IB, 6120
9111A, HP-IB, Select Code 7, 8-11
9111A, HP-IB, Select Code 8, 8-11
9121/22 Disk Drive, Built-in HP-IB, 669
9121/22 Flexible Drive, 98624 Interface, 6-70
9125S/27A Flexible Drive, 98624 Interface , 6-75
9125S/27A Flexible Drive, Built-in HPIB , 6-74
9133/34 Disk Drive, 98624 Interface, 685
9133/34 Disk Drive, 98625 Interface, 681
9133/34 Disk Drive, Built-in HP-IB, 683
9144A Tape Drive, 98624 Interface, 692
9144A Tape Drive, Built-in HP-IB, 691
Index-6
9153/54 Disk Drive, 98624 HP-IB,
Select Code 7, 6-100
9153/54 Disk Drive, 98624 HP-IB,
Select Code 8, 6-102
9153/54 Disk Drive, 98625 Interface, 698
92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem 1200,
10-60
92916A Bar Code Reader, 10-65
98287A, 5-8
98622A GPIO, Select Code 12, 5-21
98624A HP-IB, Select Code 8, 5-27
98625A Disk Interface, Select Code 14,
5-32
98700, External Addressing, 8-15
98700, Internal Addressing, 8-16
98720A, External Addressing, 8-24
98720A, Internal Addressing, 8-23
98730A, DIO-I, External Addressing,
8-28
98730A, DIO-II, 8-28
98730A, DIO-I, Internal Addressing, 827
Plotter, HP-IB, Select Code 7, 8-6
Plotter, HP-IB, Select Code 8, 8-7
Terminals, 9-12